Home

CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User`s Manual(For

1. Pl P2 LINK QJ71GF11 T LER LINK Of UO IOSUUOD jqe JOUISU JOY BULIM 9Y 08 2 Disconnecting the cable 1 2 Power off the system Press the latch down and unplug the Ethernet cable CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 7 Tests After Wiring This section describes loop and cable tests that should be performed after network wiring Perform these tests to the actual operating network configuration 4 7 1 Loop test The loop test checks each station s network line and parameter setting status to verify whether the network is Operating correctly The test allows checking the following items Item Description Master station duplication check Check if master stations on the network are duplicated Station number duplication check Check if stations on the network are duplicated Check if slave stations exceeding the number of slave stations set for the master station Out of range station No check are connected Reserved station specification S Check if specified reserved stations are actually connected check Consistency check of the number Consistency check for the number of total slave stations set by parameters and actual of connected stati
2. Relay station Network No 2 CC Link IE Field Network 1 Setting method For Routing parameters set on the Setting the CC IE Field Routing Information lt gt Page 122 Section 10 2 7 2 Transient transmission range For Multiple network system communication with a station on up to the eighth network is possible by setting routing parameters a T up T Relay station 3 CPU CPU CPU CPU module alia aid module Network No 4 Network No 1 L Relay station 4 al JE a E module mo A module module CC Link IE Field Network UOISSILUSUBI JUSISUBI E G Network No 5 m m Relay station 5 CPU module 4 q Dewo No 6 Relay station 6 E ce P E A CPU module lA P SYJOMIOU JUSJOWIP UM UONCOIUNWWWOD Z E S lA O ce lA lP P O lA P Network No 7 O E 4 Relay station 7 CPU CPU CPU module module module Network No 9 Network No 8 CPU CPU CPU module module module Relay station 8 19 5 4 SEND RECV Function 76 The SEND RECV function sends receives data to from other station s programmable controller using the MELSEC data link library function gt Page 166 CHAPTER 14 This function supports the SEND RECV instruction of link dedicated instruction Point For CC Link IE Field Network board with a serial num
3. 0 000 c cee eee ence eee 66 522 Linkscanandlinkrefresh lt se cosneeeoderesen aed duendeen dee rria ENEA 69 5 2 3 Assurance of cyclic dala INCOM 5 is aie dew dee le be eh Gee e we eee Sete oe aes 70 5 2 4 Input status of data link error station setting 0 0 cc eee 72 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart 2 0 28 1 464 25 nue ed ore a hoes toe 25 ea ee eee oe 13 5 3 Transient Transmssion 2 20005 2258 05c0c 0C peewee d nces whbeeees broker sda ve 14 5 3 1 Communication on the same network 0 aaa aaea tee ene 14 5 3 2 Communication with different networks 0 0 00000 cece 19 54A SEND RECV FUNGON 2 ooh scptenen copes needed os eens nad bebe 4s soe ea i 76 5 5 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function 83 5 6 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function 84 Bo Eveni BUN cuete 2ceaca tours Hated es noes Bo eedees dees E dae ves ceeene ss 85 58 L o p ack FUNCOM 244 c224 544 00406 deew he iani ence beb ecd babes ot eens 86 59 Diver WOT WMnGiCh 2 2 eccaevsceencnscedberteee cus coches edict ysaucbeeonees 87 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 88 6 1 Installation and Uninstallation Precautions 0 0 20 0 88 O2 dnsiallauons t 4a5 cece nS eta EE sete eee eee eee tnd een seeees 89 6 3 Uninstallation 22 2 geek o e4ce tod pin a eed es oe Ohad se aw a4 ne thwe sede
4. The tests were conducted installed in a control panel QP Quasi Peak value Mean Average value APPENDIX b Immunity requirements Standard Test description Value specified in standard EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic discharge An electrostatic discharge is applied e 8kV Air discharge l a to the enclosure of the equipment e 4kV Contact discharge immunity EN61000 4 3 80 AM modulation 1kHz Radiated radio frequency An electric field is radiated to the e 80 to 1000MHz 10V m electromagnetic field product e 1 4 to 2 0GHz 3V m immunity e 2 0 to 2 7GHz 1V m EN61000 4 4 E l l Ani ae a and AC I O Bach asian burel urst noise is applied to power lines unshielded lines mE and signal lines e DC I O analog and communication immunity nee lines 1kV e AC power AC I O power and AC I O unshielded lines 2kV CM 1kV DM EN61131 2 2007 EN61000 4 5 Lightning surge is applied to power e DC power and DC I O power lines Surge immunity lines and signal lines 0 5kV CM 0 5kV DM e DC I O AC I O shielded analog and communication lines 1kV CM EN61000 4 6 High frequency noise is applied to 0 15 to 80MHz 80 AM modulation Conducted RF immunity power lines and signal lines 1kHz 10Vrms EN61000 4 8 Power frequency magnetic The product is immersed in the S l i 50 60Hz 30A m aa 4 magnetic field of an induction coil field immunity e 0 0 5 period starting at zero EN61000 4 11 l crossing
5. MOMION Play 3 JUN Bulsoubeig Zt Display contents Display contents Describes the display contents Item Description Cable Test Result Display the cable test result error factor and troubleshooting of each port on the screen Screen button Screen button Describes the buttons in the e SelectAll button Selects all stations displayed in the list screen e Cancel All Selections button Cancels the selection status of all stations selected in the list The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples Symbol Description Example Menu name on a menu bar Diagnostics lt lt gt gt Tab name on a screen lt lt Local Security Setting gt gt Item name on a screen CC IE Field Diagnostics Button on a screen Clear Refine criteria button N Keyboard key Letif TERMS This manual uses the following terms unless otherwise specified Term CC Link IE Field Network board CC Link IE Controller Network board CC Link Ver 2 board MELSECNET H board SW1DNC CCIEF B CC IE Field Utility GX Developer GX Works2 CPU module Master local module Head module Ethernet adapter module Network module Intelligent function module Master station Local station Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station Slave station Reserved station Relay station Cyclic transmission Transient transmission Data link Routing De
6. PORT1 Test Result Normal Error Factor Troubleshooting PORT2 Test Result Cable disconnected unconnected Error Factor Cable between this PORT and connected equipment is disconnected or cable is not connected to PORT Troubleshooting Please check if cable is connected to PORT Please check if cable to connected equipment is not disconnected Close 1 Start Utility on the computer where CC Link IE Field Network board is installed The Cable test screen is displayed T Select Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics Z gt Cable Test button Enter a station number and click the button so that the test can be operated When an error occurs take actions according to the error message 61 189 8108 ZL p Buin Joy SIS L Z p 4 7 3 Communication test Communication test checks if transient transmission data can be properly routed from the own station to the communication target Take the following system configuration as an example of communication test procedure CC Link IE Field Network Own station request source Station No 2 u Relay I station 1 Station No 1 so e e e m y e e e e e e m CC Link IE e e m mm I I Relay station 2 CC Link IE Field Network Communication target 1 l I I I l I I I I I I I I I I I e e
7. The event notification is set in the event setting of the network parameter gt Page 118 Section 10 2 4 Detection T word Device a 2 Received data can be obtained as events in a user program by specifying event numbers set in the event setting using the mdWaitBdEvent function The received data are read by executing the mdReceiveEx mdReceive function after the return of the mdWaitBdEvent function Send source Own station CPU module Target station User application UOHOUNA AOAY CNAS VS mdWaitBdEvent path eventno Channel 1 x Channel 1 ae SEND mdReceiveEx path 0 255 gt Channel 2 Channel 2 ae 1 Messages received from other stations are stored to a storage channel of the target station specified in the send source 2 Specified events are notified and the mdWaitBdEvent function completes normally At this time the received channel number is stored to the detailed event information of the mdWaitBdEvent function 3 Data of channel number notified by the mdWaitBdEvent function are read from the reception buffer using the mdReceiveEx mdReceive function Point When setting the event notification function set Without setting for Reception buffer of RECV function 81 82 c Operational change according to the setting of the RECV function e RECV execution request flag The following table shows the RECV execution request flag status of link special relay according to each
8. 1 Selecting Forced Link Start will start the link Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped with link special relay SB and link special register SW gt Page 228 Appendix 3 Page 240 Appendix 4 73 5 3 Transient Transmission This function allows communication with other stations using the MELSEC data link library function Communication is also possible with different networks 5 3 1 Communication on the same network Using MELSEC data link library the programmable controllers of other stations and the buffer memory of the intelligent function module installed with the head module can be accessed gt Page 166 CHAPTER 14 1 Setting method Use the MELSEC data link library function MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 Transient transmission range It is possible to communicate with all stations on the network 74 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 3 2 Communication with different networks Setting the routing parameters in utility beforehand enables transient transmission to stations on different networks Seamless communication is also possible with the CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 1 Set the communication route by routing parameters in advance Network Parameter CC IE Field Routing Informa ara a Target Network Relay Network Relay Mo Mo Station Mo aang ii Tia
9. Disconnecting a station for which reservation has been temporarily cancelled If the master station is reset the master station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Data in Reserved station specification SWO0CO to SW00C7 and Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 The difference can be corrected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Temporarily cancel the reservation and then reserve the station again 163 jqeu uoun UOe S peAuesey Z Z EL JOM N PI 4 Ql 4UIT OD Buisoubeiq Ze 13 2 8 Enable Disable ignore station errors Set restore temporary error invalid stations This function can be performed when the connected station is a master station Screen display KO Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics 2 gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt abe Pestle rs button Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors Temporarily ignore station errors Use for network setup and commissioning Stations cannot be set to ignore errors from local station sub master station sub master operation it is not possible if the selected station is a local station sub master station sub master operation It is only possible to view the list of stations ignoring errors Settings made using this function will remain in effect until the master station sub master station is turned OFF or reset At that time all stations will be res
10. yourcomputer s system information to see whether you need an x86 32 bit or x64 64 bit version of the program and then contact the software publisher b Language environment e User programs created in the Japanese environment work only in the Japanese environment e User programs created in the English environment work only in the English environment c MELSEC data link library For precautions when using MELSEC data link library refer to the following manual LEIMELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual JUSWUOIIAUZ Bunesado SZ 37 2 6 Precautions for Use 1 When using CC Link IE Field Network board and local station of MELSEC iQ R series The following are the precautions when using CC Link IE Field Network board as a master station and using MELSEC iQ R series as a local station a When using CC Link IE Field Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are 16012 or higher Use SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later b When using CC Link IE Field Network board with a serial number whose first five digits are 16011 or lower e Use SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later e Set the RX RY setting in Network Configuration Settings that will be assigned to the master station with the following corrective actions Action Example e Before change RalRY Setting Number a PLCs Station Ma Station Type Co Ta a F z Remote Device Station del o0z0 ar a Remote Device Station
11. Control system pmm y 3 Standby system Station No 3 Tracking cable Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 4 CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module Station No 5 MELSECNET H CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 Network No 2 Standby system Control system Station No 3 Tracking cable Station No 1 Station No 2 APPENDIX Point To check which system in the Redundant CPU system is being accessed by the CC Link IE Field Network board create a program to monitor the following special relays The flag status does not change even if the tracking cable is disconnected When checking which system is being accessed System A or System B At the time of TRK CABLE ERR Link Special Relay System A System B Error code 6120 occurrence System not determined SM1511 a ON OFF OFF System A identification flag SM1512 l ae OFF ON OFF System B identification flag When checking the operation system status At the time of TRK CABLE ERR Error code 6120 occurrence Control Standby Link Special Relay system system System not determined SM1515 ON OFF OFF Control system judgment flag SM1516 OFF ON OFF Standby system judgment flag 3 Retry processing for error that occurs during system switching processing When the MELSEC data link l
12. Tracking cable No SM1600 SD1590 SD1690 Point APPENDIX Path switching is not executed when a communication to the Redundant CPU specified at Logical station No is faulty at communication start A communication error occurs When a communication is faulty refer to s Page 219 4 b in this section and Page 220 4 c in this section and clear the communication disturbance 1 First communication after execution of the mdOpen function in the MELSEC data link library communications using the mdReceiveEx mdSendEx mdDevRstEx mdDevSetEx mdRandREx mdRandWEx mdReceive mdSend mdControl mdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW or mdTypeRead function If other station access including the programmable controller CPU other than the Redundant CPU is made to 257 or more stations simultaneously communication path may not be automatically switched The following table explains details of the special relay and special registers to be monitored when estimating the occurrence of path switching Other system error flag No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system Name Description OFF No error ON Error No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system No of module for which system switching
13. lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down y E Clear Event History History Acquisition Setting Create CS File eh Display contents Network Event History S Display the list of network event history Network Event History List Each column can be sorted in ascending descending order by clicking on the column header Detailed Information Display the detailed information of an event selected in Network Event History List Poi oint The number of displayed events Up to 1000 events can be displayed When the maximum is reached the events will be erased in sequence from the oldest one and the latest events will be displayed AJO SIY JUDAS YIOMJON 9 Z EL YIOMIJON PIa 31 4UIT OD Buisoubeig ZEL Saving event history data Event history data are deleted by power cycling the system To hold event history data store them in a CSV file Sorting event history data Click each title to sort events Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 2011 01 07 14 56 11 lt lt 0023 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down 161 E button Displays the History Acquisition Setting screen Select events to be acquired History Acquisition Setting Event History Acq
14. 16 0030 onar tt Remote Device Station v dej onda onde Ts __ 5 JRemete Device Station __ 16 nos OF l l Too a sa Remote Device Station 16 oos0 _o06F Set the largest end number in all stations to multiples of 32 PAF l ool ooe 1 by changing the number of cyclic assignment points or e After change RXIRY Setting Humber a PLCs Station Mo Station Type ee eo aT a a eer 3 Remote Device Station te 0030 O03F tt Remote Device Station tej 0040 004F C G Remote Device Station tej 0060 o0sF e Before change RAIRY Setting Number k PLCs Station Na Station Type St thet atone 52 0000 on Fret vie aon te 0020 anor eB Retnote Device Station 16 0030 osr tt Remote Device Station e 0o40 004F SS Remote Device Station v tej 0050 O05F oe GfRemote Device Station tej oosa oger e After change _RXjRY Setting Mumber a PLCs Station Mo station Type ett local Station P82 oof oF ret ev a e ie oof o adding the reserved station Reduce the largest end number in all stations to 7FH or less 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains general and performance specifications of CC Link IE Field Network board 3 1 General Specifications General specifications of CC Link IE Field Network board are shown below Item Specification Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Storage ambient temperature 25 to 75 C Operating amb
15. 68 67 66 65 Sw0155 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Sw0156 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swots7 frao tt9 tt9 tt7fr tel 15 114f143 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO0A7 Stores the parameter status for each station 0 No parameter error 1 Parameter error found b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swor7o 16 15 14 13 12 nfo o e rle ls Talse Sw0171 Swo172 swo173 64 63 62 61 60 50 se 67 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swor7al20 7 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 6968 67 166105 SW0170 swo175 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 29 88 87 86 25 e4 83 82 61 _ Parameter error status SW0176 112 414 140 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 O swoi7r aen staton swor77 fraofitofiselra7fr refs ashiraliaa Each number in the table represents a station No SI7 MS Ja sIBey Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled o
16. Address 10240 to 18431 2800H to 47FFH The areas to store the value of RWr The RWr start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RWr offset size information lt gt Page 225 Appendix 2 2 4 Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses 10240 2800n RWr0 east 5 Link special relay SB Address 18432 to 18463 4800H to 481FH The areas to store the value of SB ay Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of SB Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b bO addresses sp sp sB se se se se se se se se se se sB SB sB 18432 4800H F E p c Bpflalotlstft7z7tite64i s5i 4 is3 i4e2i4 i4o SB B sB sB sB sB sB sB sB SB SB sB SB SB SB SB 6 Link special register SW Address 18464 to 18975 4820H to 4A1FH The areas to store the value of SW Bale dA p yUIT Z xIpueddy sessolppy Aiowsayy yng jo sjielagq Zz xipueddy Buffer memory 15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses 18464 4820H SWO 18465 4821h Sw 18975 4A1FH SW1FF 223 Appendix 2 2 Offset size information The areas to store the device start number and number of points for each station number Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name O Reference 19456 to 19695 4C00H to 4CEFH Page 224 1 in this section 19712 to 19951 4DO0H to 4DEFH Page 224 2 in this section 1
17. Is the station number of CC Link IE Field Network board duplicated with the station number of other station Is the Communication test lt Page 62 Section 4 7 3 result normal Is the MD function argument correct Is the target station s network number correct Is the target station number correct Is the board hardware operating normally Corrective action If the D LINK LED is OFF perform the troubleshooting Page 198 Section 16 7 11 2 In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics identify the cause of the error and perform the corrective action lt Page 145 Section 13 2 Change the duplicated station number In the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics identify the cause of the error and perform the corrective action 5 Page 145 Section 13 2 Check the MD function argument Perform the board test fs Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K gt Page 202 Section 16 8 188 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 Checking method The following show the checking methods of the board 1 Checking with eyesight Check the appearance of the device and connection status a Checking the installation and wiring Check if the installation and wiring are performed within the range of the specification e Checking installation environment K Page 190 Section 16 7 1 e Check the board installation K Page 190 Section 16 7 2 e Checking cables and wiring L
18. N Model name strin 504DH to 5056H d 20567 to 20568 Vendor specific device 5057H to 5058H information 20569 to 20575 TE 5059H to 505FH d 20576 to 24383 Other station information o Same as other station information station No 1 5060H to 5F3FH station No 2 to No 120 24384 to 32767 ETEEN 5F40H to 7FFFH Point Do not write data to System area Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Refer to Page 227 Appendix 2 4 Page 227 Appendix 2 4 43 sessalippyy ow y yng Jo SIT E CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 1 Procedure Before Operation This section explains the procedure before operating the CC Link IE Field Network board Vv Install the software package I Page 89 Section 6 2 Install the software package on a personal computer Install the board lt Page 50 Section 4 3 4 Install the board to a slot on the personal computer Set the channel number lt Page 51 Section 4 4 Set the channel number and confirm it with the utility Vv a aS Ks Page 52 Section 4 5 Test the hardware of the installed board v Wire the cables Wire the network cables for the installed board KL Page 55 Section 4 6 v 2e DA EMEIEr lt Page 110 CHAPTER 10 Set the parameters and check them with the utility v Check the network Page 59 Section 4 7 Test the cable connection and data link on
19. Not Defined 4M Local Policies E Network security Restrict NTLM Outgoing NTLM traffic to Not Defined Ap p rova M od e P rom pt fo r consen t gt AEA i Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon Disabled 2 a Us Recovery console Allow floppy copy and access to all drives Disabled gt il Windows Firewall with Advanced Seci 4 Shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to Enabled E Network List Manager Policies be Shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile Disabled gt Public Key Policies ie System cryptography Force strong key protection for user k Not Defined gt E Software Restriction Policies Gio System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms for en Disabled gt Application Control Policies ki System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows Enabled D a IP Security Policies on Local Compute t System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal s Enabled b 1 Advanced Audit Policy Configuration L System settings Optional subsystems Posix bie System settings Use Certificate Rules on Windows Executabl Disabled be User Account Control Admin Approval Mode for the Built i Disabled a User Account Control Allow UlAccess applications to prom Disabled User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for Prompt for consent for ie User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for Prompt for credentials ie User Account
20. Station Station Station No 0 No 1 No 2 Own station Receiving Sending request source relay station relay station S 9 UONEDIUNWWOD P 63 CHAPTER 5 Functions This chapter explains the functions of the CC Link IE Field Network board 5 1 Function List The following table explains the function list of the CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Cyclic transmission a Communication I O data in bit units is communicated between the own station and by RWw and RWr other stations board and the device of the driver is performed automatically Page 120 Section 10 2 5 This mode is selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the cyclic transmission and transient Page 112 Section 10 2 1 Page 260 Appendix 6 Mode selection for cyclic A transmission frequency transmission l The mode can be selected from Online Normal mode and Online High speed mode Constant link scan setting can be selected to execute the link scan at Link scan mode setting NEUR Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 a constant time interval The cyclic data integrity is assured in units of 32 bits or station based Page 70 Section 5 2 3 Assurance of cyclic data integrity units Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 Input status setting for data link Select whether the input data from another station where the data Page 72 Section 5 2 4 faulty station link error occurred is cleared or held Page 117
21. gt Page 95 Section 8 1 uoljounj aiempuey jo abueyuyD p O xipueddy SUOI JOUN PSAOJdW pue MeN Q0 Xipueddy g Q Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Program name CCIEFUTL exe B CCIEFUTL exe Publisher Unknown Unidentified Publisher File origin Network drive gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for W Show details No gt Allow Change when these notifications appear I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before X Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer 265 Appendix 11 2 Methods for preventing warning message 266 Point The user account control UAC function prevents a crash e g prevention of start up of a program which executes unintended operation Before setting this function grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message 1 Disabling user account control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account control function a Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Internet Internet Explorer ey E mail l Windows Mail lal Welcome Center Backup Status and Configuration gt Windows Media Player a Small Business Resources Windows Fax and Scan g Windows Meeting Space
22. 22Y or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP 23Z or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 1 10L or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP SWODNC MNETH B SW1DNC CCBD2 B 1 11M or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 1 11M or earlier MELSEC Data Link Function HELP SW1DNC MNETG B 1 12N or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual SW1DNC CCIEF J 1 00A MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference 1 00A MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference SW1DNC CCIEF B a 1 02C or later MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 1 Depending on the installation of other software packages the manuals shown above are also displayed In this case select the following manual LA MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SWODNC MNETH B Version 27D or later 3 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCBD2 Version 1 15R or later 4 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC MNETG B Version 1 17T or later 5 MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later 6 When SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 02C or later is installed MELSEC Data Link Library Programmer s Reference is deleted c Driver
23. Description 20512 5020H Manufacturer code 20513 5021H Model type The own station s board information is stored 20514 5022H Model code 20515 60255 2 Own station controller information Address 20520 to 20536 5028H to 5038H Address Decimal Hexadecimal Description The status of valid or invalid of the value stored in 20520 5028H A s a the own eon controller information is stored valid invalid flag 0 Invalid 1 Valid 20521 5029H 20522 502AH 20523 502BH 20524 502Cn The own station s board information is stored 20525 to 20534 502DH to 5036H Vendor specific device 20535 to 20536 5037H to 5038H information 226 APPENDIX Appendix 2 4 Other station information The areas to store the other stations information on the network 1 Other station network card information station number 1 Address 20544 to 20551 5040H to 5047h Address Decimal Hexadecimal Description 20544 5040H Manufacturer code 20545 5041H Model type The information of other station station No 1 is 20546 5042H Model code stored 20547 5043H Version 20548 to 20551 5044H to 504714 System area 2 Other station controller information station number 1 Address 20552 to 20575 5048H to 505FH Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name Description The status of valid or invalid of the value stored in the other station controller information station Controller information 2055
24. Event ID Error message Corrective action 256 01001 258 0102H 259 0103H 279 0117H 280 0118H 286 011EH 287 011FH 288 0120H e Reinstall the software package e Check the board installation condition lt _ gt Page 190 Section 16 7 2 Because the error had occurred inthe e If the board operates normally on another personal computer the personal during starting of the device the device computer failure is speculated Repair or change the personal computer was not able to be executed e If the error occurs on another personal computer replace the board e If any of the above actions do not solve the error reinstall the operating system e Restart the personal computer e Check the board installation condition gt Page 190 Section 16 7 2 e If the board operates normally on another personal computer the personal computer failure is speculated Repair or change the personal computer e If the error occurs on another personal computer replace the board e If any of the above actions do not solve the error consult your local service Time out was detected while accessing the board center or representative The board more than the maximum number of sheets which was able to be Remove the board which exceeds the maximum number of applicable boards installed was detected e Restart the personal computer after installing the software package and check if the error does n
25. F station Station No 2 Network configuration screen display Connected Station Master 0 Divergence Connected Station Master 0 Local 1 Intelli 2 i E Connected Station Master 0 Divergence P1 be P2 Intell 3 Intell 4 Locak1 Intelli 2 Connected Station Master 0 Local 1 Intelli 2 E i However in the following cases network configuration displayed in the network configuration screen differs from the actual configuration Network configuration Two stations are connected through a switching hub Switching hubs are in cascade connection 154 Actual system configuration Master station anhi Station No 0 pai hub i Intelligent device station Station No 1 Station Na Switching hub Switching hub Intelligent device Intelligent device Intelligent device Intelligent device station Station No 1 station Station No 2 station Station No 3 station Station No 4 Network configuration screen display Branches are not displayed in the network configuration display area Connected Station Master 0 Intelli 1 P1 ig _ i Only one branch is displayed Connected Station Master 0 Divergence P1 m E Intelli 1 l ii Intelli 2 Intelli 3 Intelli 4 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 6 Disconnected station status monitor Displays a
26. Field Network Routing parameters for stations of network No 1 Target Network Relay Network Relay o o Station No p 3 No setting is required for station 3 No 3 because data are transmitted via the station itself Routing parameters for stations of network No 2 EEPE ey er eee reer eee No setting is required for station feos A eee eee No 0 because data are transmitted E via the station itself 2 No setting is required for station No 2 because data are transmitted via the station itself Routing parameters for stations of network No 3 Target Network Relay Network Relay des d No setting is required for station W o o a No 3 because data are transmitted 3 J Via the station itself 62 Start Utility on the computer where CC Link IE Field Network board is installed Set the routing parameters on the Routing Parameter Setting screen as shown in the figure to left gt Page 122 Section 10 2 7 Write the network parameters being set to the CC Link IE Field Network board Online Write to Board Reset the specified board Online lt gt Reset operation CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Open the Communication Test screen and set Communication Test Communication Test Contents data to Communication Destination Setting and Connected Station Own m Target Station _ Communication Data Setting u poren e 2 Gaa Communicat
27. Normal Mode and Online High Speed Mode refer to the following section L Page 260 Appendix 6 b Local stations The following modes can be selected Item Description Online Select this mode to connect the station to the network for performing data link with other stations Offline Select this mode to disconnect the station from the network for stopping data link with other stations 112 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 2 Network configuration setting Set parameters of slave stations slave station points link device assignment to the master station and set link scan mode and block data assurance per station This setting is available when CC IE Field Master Station is selected in the network setting Display contents VW View gt Network Parameter lt gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Network Configuration Setting Network Parameter CC IE Field Network Configuration Setting Board No 1 Set up Network configuration r Assignment Method 5 __RX RY Setting RWw RWr Setting Points Start End Points start Supplementary setting Equal Assignment Identical Point Assignment Clear Check End Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen zE SO Item Description _ o Assignment Method Select an assignment method for send range of each station z LA Number of PLCs Display the number of stations from 1 to total stations
28. Page 190 Section 16 7 3 b Checking the board appearance The board status and network status can be checked by MODE LED or switch setting e Checking LED status K Page 196 Section 16 7 11 e Checking channel numbers K Page 195 Section 16 7 8 2 Checking the error check the screen displayed on a personal computer a Checking with the operating system The driver operation status can be checked with Device Manager or event viewer e Checking personal computer and operating system Page 191 Section 16 7 5 e Checking on Device Manager screen K Page 192 Section 16 7 6 e Checking operations with event viewer K Page 193 Section 16 7 7 b Checking with the utility The board status and network status can be checked with the utility e Checking channel numbers K Page 195 Section 16 7 8 e Checking operations with board diagnostics L Page 195 Section 16 7 9 e Checking operations with tests L Page 195 Section 16 7 10 e Checking LED status K gt Page 196 Section 16 7 11 e Checking network status with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics k Page 200 Section 16 7 12 e Checking network status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special registers SW KL Page 201 Section 16 7 13 e Checking communication status with monitoring access target device L Page 201 Section 16 7 14 189 poyjyew Buloy 2 91 16 7 1 Checking installation environment Check if the installation environment is within the general sp
29. W Device Write lt gt Bit device set Bit device reset Device Type Device Type x direct link input Network No 1 r DeviceNo HEX CDEC ocr ooo Operating procedure 1 Setthe type and number of devices whose current status are to be changed Item Description Set a type of devices whose status are to be changed Device Type e Enter a network number for LX LY LB and LSB l Set a start number of devices whose status are to be changed Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 2 Clickthe Execute button Point Devices that can be changed The only devices that can be changed in this function are ones that have random access capability If a device that is not capable of random access is specified a device type error will occur For details of the random access capability of each device refer to the following manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 139 44O pue NO sediAap yq Bulun 7Z 9 Z1 senje uano BuibueuD 9 Z A bit device can also be turned ON and OFF by double clicking the device column of the device information on the monitoring screen 0000 0 Device Monitor Utility x 0001 0 p Change the device X 0000 to ON A All right Click _ Yes 140 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 Switching Display Format This section explains a method for switching a display format such as in hexadecimal or in decimal of device information f
30. e Do not install the communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 in or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise e Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board Then check for any incomplete connection Poor contact may cause an erroneous input or output e Do not touch the core of the cable side or module side connector and protect it from dirt or dust If oil from gt gt your hand dirt or dust is attached to the core it can increase transmission loss arising a problem in data p link 3g e Attach a connector cover to a connector which is not connected to an Ethernet cable to prevent foreign 7 matter such as dirt or dust a D 3 Precautions for Ethernet cable e Check the following e Is any Ethernet cable disconnected e Does any Ethernet cable short e Are the connectors securely connected e Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction e The maximum station to station distance is 100m However the distance may be shorter depending on the operating environment of the cable For details contact your cable manufacturer e The bend radius of the Ethernet cable is limited For details see the specifications of the Ethernet cable to be used 99 06 4 Connecting and disconnecting Ethernet cable e Misalignment of the connecting slot of
31. f Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data RXIRY Hold Input Data RXR Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set the parameter name of the Network Operation Setting Parameter Name Setting range Up to 8 characters Data Link Faulty Station Setting Select whether to hold or clear data input from the slave station where a data link error has occurred 2 Clickthe nd __ button Buijes uonesado YWIOMION EZO JojaweJed YIOMIEN puys ZOL 117 10 118 2 4 Event setting Set conditions to notify events to a user program Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen c gt Event Setting Network Parameter CC IE Field Event Setting Board No 1 CA 0000 Edge Detect w 0020 Level Detect w M E E E 0000 Edge Detect w i Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Input Device Code Device No Detection Method Event Condition Word Device Setting Value Channel No Event No 1 When selecting RECV Fun m EASGE ERRET E S VWCovuriNnuorl Set the format of the setting value Set the link device name for the event condition Set the link device number for the event condition Setting range For link devices RX and RY 0 to 3FFF For link devices SB and SW 0 to 01FF For link devices RWw and RWr 0 to 1FFF Set the detection method L
32. gt Page 119 1 in this section Set the event condition lt _ gt Page 119 1 in this section Set the word device setting value Setting range For DEC 0 to 65535 For HEX 0000 to FFFF Set the channel number use for dedicated instructions Setting range 1 to 2 Set the event number Setting range 0 to 15 ction set No Setting for RECV Function Reception Buffer in the driver setting 2 Click the End button CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS Screen button Clear button Clears all settings Check button Checks whether the settings are correct 1 Combination of detection method and event condition The following table shows results and events of the combination of detection method and event condition Detection Event Pate Device Description Method Condition 0N An event occurs at the rising edge of the device RX Edge Detect oy L sOrF An event occurs at the falling edge of the device OO ON An event occurs by turning ON the device SB Level Detect i oF An event occurs by turning OFF the device An event occurs when values match First time only RWw Edge Detect An event occurs when values do not match First time only RWr An event occurs when values change First time only SW An event occurs when values match Level Detect An event occurs when values do not match RECV Function Edge Detect Pe An event occurs when a specified channel receives data 119 Buas JUeAZ y Z O
33. insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue Found New Hardware Wizard 5 Insert the CD ROM of the software package to the CD ROM Please choose your search and installation options A E drive A bese eee ere 6 Select Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed m n I lt For 32 bit version operating system 1 gt C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Z Include this location in the search Check Include this location in the search and specify aen T Drivers x86 of the CD ROM drive to be used Don t search will choose the driver to install Example D Drivers x86 Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware lt For 64 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x64 C JC 1 The operating system can be checked by Windows system information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 4 End If the troubleshooting above does not help r
34. please select presence on the MELSECNET 10 Network Channel No 181 NoMNET 10 MNET 10 Exists Channel No 182 WoMNET 10 MNET 10 Exists Channel No 183 NoMNET I0 MNET 10 Exists ChannelNo 18 4 NWoMNET i0 MNET 10 Exists Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set the target network number Numbers cannot be overlapped Target Network No Setting range 1 to 239 Set the first relay network number in the path to the target network Relay Network No Setting range 1 to 239 Set the first relay station number in the path to the target network Relay Station No Setting range 0 to 120 Condition Setting of Relay Set whether MELSECNET 10 network is used for routing the network Target Network 2 Click the End button Screen button Clear button Clears all settings Check button Checks whether the settings are correct 122 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 1 Target relay network For a relay station set in the routing parameter set a relay station of the own network which is routed by the transient transmission lex A setting to perform transient transmission to network number To go to network No station No of its own network No B Target Network Relay Network Relay No No Station Mo pi m 4 No routing parameter setting is required for network No because the module of network No is mounted on the rela
35. special registers SW LED Status SB SW The value of SW0043 is 0 or 1 MODE The value of SW0043 is 2 OFF The value of SW0043 is 6 7 or 9 SB0049 is OFF D LINK SB0049 is ON and SD0047 is OFF OFF SB0049 is ON and SD0047 is ON SB006C is ON or SBOO6D is ON aia OFF SBOO6C is OFF and SBOO6D is OFF Check the LED status and take the corresponding corrective actions LED Description Reference BEDE T OT Damdo s rmana Data send receive is not performed Corrective action ON Operating normaly Sending dai Communication error has occurred Page 184 Section 16 5 1 A hardware failure or a board WDT error has Page 182 Section 16 4 1 occurred Driver is not started Page 183 Section 16 4 3 ON Driver WDT error has occurred Page 183 Section 16 4 2 lt PCI bus PCI Express bus error has occurred Page 183 Section 16 4 4 P1 P2 normally RJ45 connector e The board does not perform loopback unnecessary LINK H e Linkup in progress L ER LED e The module received abnormal data Page 199 3 in this e The board is performing loopback section LINK LED Page 199 4 in this LINK Linkdown in progress section If the LED does not turn ON synchronized with the utility display or execution status of the board the LED failure may occurred In this case replace the board bo bo Ja FL ms 5 JBE ES Zz e The module received normal data Corrective action 196 CHAPT
36. 104 103 102 104 100 99 98 97 swoocr fraoh rola tehtizfitefrasfira iis Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored 250 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local A station station Stores the setting status of error invalid stations 0 Other than error invalid station 1 Error invalid station b15 614 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swoooo 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 71615 43 2 1 swooo1 32 31 30 20 26 27 26 26 24 23 22 21 20 10 10 17 swoon2 SWO0DO a Swo0D3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 id ener invalid station swoop4 80 7978 77 76 75 74 73 72 74 70 69 68 67 66 65 O swoop7 Sere swoops 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 swoon6 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swoon7 fraofita rselrizfrtefrasiira ita Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Stat
37. 13 gt Program Compatibility Assistant If this screen is displayed during the installation or at the This program might not have installed correctly this program didn t install correctly try reinstalling using settings that installation completion click This program installed are compatible w IS version o Indows a ee ae Corporation corre ctl y AEEA ai If this screen is displayed when the installation is aborted Reinstall using recommended settings click the Cancel button and close the screen This program installed correctly Do not select Reinstall using recommended settings An incorrect module may be installed What settings are applied W Windows Security amp Windows can t verify the publisher of this driver software Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device Click Install this driver software anyway Install this driver software anyway Only install driver software obtained from your manufacturer s website or disc Unsigned software from other sources may harm your computer or steal information v See details 174 screens Would you like to install this device software Name Fe Publisher MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION l Always trust software from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION You should only inst
38. 6 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 Section 8 1 Section 10 2 5 Chapter 12 Section 12 2 1 Section 12 2 3 Section 13 2 2 Chapter 16 Section 16 2 Section 16 7 6 Section 16 7 11 Section 16 9 5 Section 16 10 4 Section 16 11 Appendix 5 Appendix 8 Appendix 9 Appendix 12 Appendix 12 2 Appendix 13 Appendix 13 1 Appendix 13 2 Appendix 14 Appendix 14 3 Oct 2013 SH 080980ENG E Section 6 2 2 Section 6 2 3 Section 16 2 3 Section 16 2 4 Section 3 3 Section 6 2 1 Section 16 8 Section 16 9 Section 16 9 1 Section 16 10 Appendix 7 Appendix 17 Appendix 18 Section 4 3 4 Section 5 9 Section 6 2 Section 16 1 Section 16 3 Section 16 3 1 Section 16 3 2 Section 16 3 3 Section 16 3 4 Section 16 3 5 Section 16 4 Section 16 4 1 Section 16 4 2 Section 16 4 3 Section 16 4 4 Section 16 5 Section 16 5 1 Section 16 5 2 Section 16 5 3 Section 16 5 4 Section 16 5 5 Section 16 6 Section 16 6 1 Section 16 6 2 Section 16 7 Section 16 9 2 Section 16 9 3 Section 16 10 7 Appendix 11 Appendix 13 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS INTRODUCTION RELATED MANUALS TERMS PACKING LIST Section 2 1 Section 2 5 Section 3 2 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 4 Jan 2014 SH 080980ENG E PPn 4 5 4 Ba 10 2 2 SEKEN 13 2 Section eee Chapter Th Section va Section 16 7 4 Section 16 7 7 Section 16 7 11 Section 16 8 Appendix 7 Appendix 9 Appendix 11 2 Appendix 14 1 Appendix 15 1 Appendix 15 2 286 Print date Manual number Revision Sec
39. 92 CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY 7 2 Menu List This section explains functions of CC IE Field Utility Project Reference New Create a new project Page 102 Section 9 1 Open Open an existing project Page 103 Section 9 2 Close Close an open project Page 108 Section 9 6 Save Save a project Page 104 Section 9 3 Save As Name and saves a project Compress Unpack Delete Verify The latest file 1 to 4 Compress and saves a project Page 106 Section 9 4 Unpack a compressed project Delete an existing project Page 108 Section 9 5 Verifying data of an open project and data of another project Page 109 Section 9 7 Display the recently used CC IE Field Utility project paths and opens the selected project Exit Exit CC IE Field Utility Page 95 Section 8 1 Edit Reference Network Parameter Toolbar Toolbar name Channel No Setting Read from Board Write to Board Verify Board Reset Operation Device Monitor Utility Board Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics View Reference Set the network parameters Page 110 CHAPTER 10 Page 97 Section 8 2 2 Display hide the toolbar Online Reference Display change board channel numbers Page 125 Section 11 1 Read parameters from the board Page 126 Section 11 2 Write parameters to the board Verify parameters set to the board and parameters of open project Reset the board Start Device Monitor Utility Page 127 Section 11 3
40. Ai a edna eee be 48 4 3 2 Installation environment 2 2 0 0 eects 49 4 3 3 Procedure for replacing mounting bracketS 0 0 00 cee eee teens 49 ASA BOatd MSO esens rrai thes tweed dae tee tds bee eens aay 50 AA Setting Channel Numbers n aaa naana aaan aaeeea 51 4 5 Tests Before Wiring Standalone Tests of the Board 0 0 0 eee 52 An BUSRIT e 40 44 ers Bas Oh ae Oa ae oe eerie Mr PAA nb ae ae Se Re ae Be 52 BR Momor ACS cine cen neniarn aa a E haere E EO tok a Reds 53 A53 Hardware tee ear ead hee eases eed EERE EER AEE hacer ae ERARE 53 4 5 4 Self loopback test 0 0 eee eee e eee e eben 54 46 WIWDQie 2300 gusreed nessun gon EEEE Gd omy Bees OER her eRe Sees EE D0 4 6 1 Wiring PrecauiOns lt cig cco pecieen at ncotnaw pcos eng tan meanuien cp eae dna 99 4 6 2 Ethernet cable connection unusu nauau annann naaa oF 10 47 Tests After WIRKG ous one juxceuseeeen ud ou eee Boston i wees 2hee setae bes doseeens 59 BP OOO 166 coos oo5c6 cane es ote EE E E cue eee E E E E cee 59 Ade Cable test want ec oe eee E Pee ee ee he Pe Ok ee oe oe ew Bee ee 61 4 7 3 Communication test auauua tie dln Be acdine ddd ah or ale waar bs oe epee baveee 62 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 64 S1 UINCUOn eistecc oo5eceeen es ces ss deere obese Ane see dees obese ahh eeees 64 52 Cyclic HansmilesiON 22 5 2 nenien oot vane E ous ed Gee edu eeeaaae sal 66 5 2 1 Data flow and link device assignment
41. BV Address Gothaer Strasse 8 40880 Ratingen Germany Appendix 14 1 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive The EMC Directive sets two requirements for compliance emission conducted and radiated electromagnetic energy emitted by a product and immunity the ability of a product to not be influenced by externally generated electromagnetic energy This section summarizes the precautions for machinery constructed with the CC Link IE Field Network board to comply with the EMC Directive These precautions are based on the requirements of the EMC Directive and the harmonized standards However they do not guarantee that the entire machinery constructed according to the descriptions complies with the EMC Directive The manufacture of the machinery must determine the testing method for compliance and declare conformity to the EMC Directive 1 EMC Directive related standards a Emission requirements Standard Test description Value specified in standard EN61131 2 2007 4 2 278 e 30 to 230MHz QP 40dBuV m measured at 10m distance 2 e 230 to 1000MHz QP 47dByuV m measured at 10m distance e 0 15 to 0 5MHz QP 79dB The noise level which the product Mean 66dB 2 CISPR16 2 3 The electromagnetic wave which the ol product emits to the external space is Radiated emission 1 measured CISPR16 2 1 CISPR16 1 2 emits to the power line is measured e 0 5 to 30MHz QP 73dB Mean 60dB 1 Conducted emission
42. D903H D905H D906H D909H D90AH D90BH D90CH D90DH DAOOH to DAE7H DAE8H DAF 1H DAF 2H DAF3H DAF5H to DAF7H Buffer memory start parameter error Flash ROM failure Communication RAM failure Incorrect online test data Communication test retry error Communication monitoring time in communication test timed out Transmission completion wait time in communication test timed out Header information error in transient data Double communication test data received Incorrect number of stations Communication target station specification error Cable test retry error Hardware error Switch setting error Failed to write to flash ROM MAC address read error Hardware error CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Corrective action e Correct the following settings in the buffer memory start parameter area D81DH Total number of slave stations D81FH Station number range D820H Total number of slave stations D821H Slave station setting information D822H Station type D823H Offset values or points assigned to the devices of each station D824H Setting flag D825H Setting flag application parameter and information setting data e A number of data writes to the flash ROM has exceeded its limit Check the network event history and configure the setting not to generate events consecutively This error code cannot be cleared To clear this error code please consult your local Mitsu
43. Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility Page 143 Section 13 1 Set Mode to Self Loopback Test and click the Start Test button The result is displayed on Test Result field lf the test completes abnormally replace the Ethernet cable and execute the test again Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative with the detailed problem description CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 6 Wiring This section explains the cable wiring and precautions For cables and hubs used for the wiring and network configuration refer to the system configuration gt Page 25 CHAPTER 2 4 6 1 Wiring Precautions The following explains wiring precautions 1 Precautions for turning on e Turn off the external power supply for the system in all phases before installing the board or starting wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock damage to the product or malfunction e After installation of the board and wiring attach the cover on the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock 2 Handling e Place the Ethernet cable in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact e Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer Such foreign matter may cause a fire failure or malfunction
44. I I I I Link scan I number 1 Driver Station Link refresh A Link refresh A Station 6 number 1 Send range DLL TO Difrom station number 2 4 4 XN 4 Ce m ee eed See eee E Area for sending to other stations e Output from the master station The status data of the user program are stored in the driver by MD function Local station Board Master station Board ee RX RWr RX RWr Station MD function D oc ona v 2 3 Driver eo 6 36 Se Se a B Ss a Ss PF Ss Ss Ss BP SP a BP SP BP ET ET EF EB a a a e e e a a e a a a a a a a a a a UOISSILUSUBI IIPAN Z S The status data of the driver are stored in the link devices RY and RWw of the master station board by link refresh The status data of the link device RY RWw of the master station is stored in the link device RX RWr of the local station by link scan The status data of the link device RX RWr of the local station board is stored in the driver jUQWUBISse 9149p Yul pue mol eed 1 Z S e Input from the local station The status data of the driver is stored in the own station send range of the link device RY RWw of the local station board by link refresh The status data of the link devices RX and RWr of the local station are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station by link scan The status data of the
45. Iq Windows Photo Gallery amp Windows Live Messenger Download yY Paint gt All Programs Start Search Pp _ EYE gt Control Panel System and Maintenance Get started with Windows Back up your computer Security Check for updates Check this computer s security status Allow a program through Windows Firewall Network and Internet Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Set up file sharing Hardware and Sound f Eel Play CDs or other media automatically Print Mouse Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Change battery settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings 4 1 Documents Pictures Music Search Recent Items Computer Network Connect To Control Panel Default Programs Help and Support User Accounts Add or remove user accounts Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Customize colors Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods J Additional Options Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display To the next page Open Control Panel Select User Accounts APPENDIX From the previous page 3 Select User Accounts EIS gt Control Panel User Accounts Control Panel Home User Accounts em and Maintenance Change your account picture Add or remove user accounts Cha
46. JeUJE Xy G xipueddy min ke ccs 3 mer unit mm 283 INDEX 0to9 Loopback function 0 o a aicw wes sea eae Roa a ae es 86 115 _ lt Low profile bracket 000 00 ce euae 20 32 bit data assurance 0 2000 e ae 70 M A Master station 2 2 0 0 0 cee eee eee 112 Automatic return 0 0 0 00 eee ee eee 65 MD TNGHONSs fa esac be bagaeeee pee ven es 166 Mode cee ee eee 112 260 B MODE LED side w 55 5 douse dae tee en ee 197 Block Data Assurance per Station 70 N Board Diagnostics 0 000 eee aee 143 Buffer MemMOry 6d wiameredan bree wtia 41 222 Network configuration 0000 05 147 Network type 2 ee ee 111 C Noise filter nonna anaua 281 n Number of connectable stations 40 CC IE Field Diagnostics 146 CC IE Field Utility 92 p CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 145 ee Channel saciesas erans gumai eng ounce 51 125 Patch cord removal tool 0000 56 Channel use for dedicated instruction 17 PCI buS 000 cee eee eee eee ee eens 34 Cyclic transmission 44 lt 22oicau Steen gentadee 64 PCI Express buS 00 0000 c eee eee 34 Product information 02000 0 ee 143 D Product version 0 0 0 ee eee ee 133 DENKLED oie 6s Seven 6 5d wed ot S mw ay age Oa ww 198 R data link fau
47. MANAGEMENT This chapter explains basic operations of CC IE Field Utility such as creating opening and saving projects 9 1 Creating Projects Create a new project Screen display Tf Project gt New ja CC IE Field Utility Unset project Network Parameter CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Routing Parameters Check End Cancel Point Creating a new project with data read from the board A new project is created with the data read from the CC Link IE Field Network board when data are read from the board before creating a new project For reading data from board 3 Page 126 Section 11 2 A note on creating a new project Do not change the storage location or file name of created workspace or project folder file using an application such as Windows Explorer 102 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9 2 Opening Existing Projects Read a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer Screen display Project gt Open Open Project Save Folder Path L Documents and Settings xP My Documents Browse Workspace Project List Workspace Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Enter the folder drive path where the workspace is saved Save Folder Path The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by
48. MELSEC Interface Bog F For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of ee ee l W Windows were changed as follows WEF Windows were changed as follows Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Invalidating the fast startup settings Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Appendix 13 1 installing MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically when the software package is installed to a personal computer The operation starts after the personal computer is restarted J euepamodoJSIIN E xipueddy Appendix 13 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager J euepyamodoJSIIN Bburjjeisuy Le xipueddy MELSECPowerManager is uninstalled automatically when the software package is uninstalled However it is not uninstalled when another software package of MELSEC interface board is installed to the personal computer Uninstall all software packages for MELSEC interface board installed on the personal computer to uninstall MELSECPowerManager 275 Appendix 13 3 checking MELSECPowerManager The following explains how to check the installation and operating status of MELSECPowerManager The following is a setting example when using Windows 7 1 Open Control Panel System and Security Adjust your computer s settings View by Category System and Security User Account
49. PAUSE stop error b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swooro 16 15 14 18 2 11 10 e Je r es Tale T24 SwooF SWOOF 2 33 SwWooF3 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 swoor4 eo 78 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 60 8 SWOOFO SWOOF5 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 to CPU RUN status each swoore 112 114 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 1021 101 100 swoor7 Station swoor7 fi2011911181171116 Each number in the table represents a station O o A Ni oe Jajo _ olo on N k for oO k 21 oo O is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SW00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the stop error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Stop error b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SW0100 to CPU operation status 06 105 104 103 102 101 100 swoto7 20h station 1 Swo107 SSS E E E ccs cm ccnre Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the er
50. Page 113 Section 10 2 2 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 2 Link scan and link refresh Link scan is executed asynchronously with the link refresh which is executed by the CC Link IE Field Network board driver Link refresh time Setting time Setting time Setting time Setting time Link refresh Link refresh Link refresh Link scan 1 Setting method Link refresh is executed at the interval of time set for Link refresh cycle on the Driver setting screen of CC IE Field Utility gt Page 120 Section 10 2 5 Link refresh time can be checked on the Board Diagnostics screen lt gt Page 143 Section 13 1 Point The link refresh may not be executed in the set cycle because of such factors described below e Performance of the personal computer CPU e Number of set refresh points e Number of installed CC Link IE Field Network boards e Other running applications e Other running boards If the link refresh time exceeds the link refresh cycle set on the Device setting screen perform any of the following measures e Extend the link refresh cycle L Page 120 Section 10 2 5 Ifthe shortened link refresh time effects the operation of the applications perform the following measure e Extend the link refresh cycle gt Page 120 Section 10 2 5 UOISSILUSUBI IIPAN Z S ys 1 1 Jul pue ueos yul ZZS 69 5 2 3 Assurance of cyclic data integrity The cyclic data integrity can be
51. Page 128 Section 11 4 Page 129 CHAPTER 12 Reference Page 143 Section 13 1 Page 145 Section 13 2 Diagnostics Diagnose the operating status of the board Diagnose the CC Link IE Field Network 93 So N z 49 3 Cai D ana 94 Cascade Tile Vertically Tile Horizontally Arrange Icons Close All Switch to other window Window Manual About Window Tile windows in overlapping display Tile windows vertically Tile windows horizontally Arrange the icons at the bottom of the window Close all open windows Display the open window Display a list of open windows Also open or arrange specified windows Help Display the manual Display product information such as the version Reference Page 99 Section 8 2 3 Reference Page 101 Section 8 3 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of CC IE Field Utility 8 1 Starting and Exiting This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting CC IE Field Utility 1 Starting up Start up CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 TZ Clicking the icon registered in the Start of Windows 41 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs 2 CC IE Field Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later All Programs m b
52. Power voltage is momentarily Voltage dips and interruption rA e 0 250 300 period 50 60Hz immunity ee 40 10 12 period 50 60Hz e 70 25 30 period 50 60Hz 1 The tests were conducted installed in a control panel BANDBJIG OW 34 ym Ajdwood 0 seunseay_ p xipueddy SAAILOSYIG ADVLIOA MOT ANY OWS y Xipueddy 279 2 Installation in a control panel The installation in the control board ensures safety as well as effective shielding of personal computer emitted electromagnetic noise a Control panel e Use a conductive control panel e Mask off the area used for grounding when securing the top or bottom plate to the control panel using bolts e To ensure electrical contact between the inner plate and the control panel mask off the bolt installation areas of an inner plate so that conductivity can be ensured in the largest possible area e Ground the control panel with a thick ground cable so that low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies e Keep the diameter of the holes on the control panel to 10cm or less If the diameter is larger than 10cm electromagnetic wave may be emitted In addition because electromagnetic wave leaks through a clearance between the control panel and its door reduce the clearance as much as possible Use of EMI gaskets sealing the clearance can suppress undesired radiated emissions The tests by Mitsubishi were conducted using a control panel having the damping characterist
53. Section 10 2 3 During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission is stopped Data reception from the slave station and data transmission Page 73 Section 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart from own stations are stopped Also the stopped cyclic i Ppa Page 120 Section 10 2 5 transmission is restarted Transient transmission is not stopped 2 Transient transmission Communicate with other station s programmable controller by MELSEC data link library function Communication by MELSEC data e Device reading and writing of other station s programmable link library function controller e Remote operation to other station s programmable controller Page 74 Section 5 3 1 Page 76 Section 5 4 Page 166 CHAPTER 14 e Data reading and writing of an intelligent device station Setting the routing parameters beforehand also enables transient Seamless transmission with transmission to stations in different networks Communication can Page 75 Section 5 3 2 different networks also be performed with CC Link IE Controller Network and Page 122 Section 10 2 7 MELSECNET H 64 3 RAS function Function Slave station disconnection Automatic return Loopback function CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS Reference Only the stations where an error has occurred including slave stations are disconnected from the network and the data link is continued only with the stations operating normally In a line t
54. Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 1 SW0070 0 No loopback stations 1 to 120 Slave station 125 Master station 65535 Station number not set If a station whose station number duplicates is performing loopback this register stores the duplicated number Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT1 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned ON the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT1 The count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations When Clear communication error count SBOO06 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT1 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions Stores the count of the network event history This stored count is cleared when Event count clear SB0009 is turned ON Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the PORT2 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at
55. Target station No error in transient data Target station No error in transient data Transient transmission failed Parameter error Parameter error Link scan mode constant link scan time setting error Hardware error Parameter error Device range assignment error Corrective action e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 of the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e When the receiving station encountered overloading of transient data send the data from the source after a give time has elapsed e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Adjust the following settings at the request source of transient and retry the operation D2A3H Number of data frame length D2A4H Header information D2A5x Target station nu
56. When using the loopback function Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameter Page 86 Section 5 8 e The system contains a switching hub 1 Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured Page 86 Section 5 8 If incorrect correct the network parameter and rewrite it When data link starts over the network the action is successful 2 Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power off and then on the hub Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network 3 When data link starts over the network check the network configuration by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 145 Section 13 2 Change the duplicated station number Perform the board test L gt Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 LERR LED L ER LED is turned ON L ERR LED is an LED which does not exist on the board Check the status with the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Page 155 Section 13 2 2 7 This indicates a occurrence of received data error or loop error The L ER LED of the port which detected the error is turned ON The error detail can be checked with the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics gt Page 147 Section 13 2 2 L ERR LED is turned OFF automatically when a normal data is received or the loopback function is not performed in a ring topology Check Corrective action e Check
57. Windows Touch or Touch e Modern Ul e Client Hyper V e Server Core Installation e Upgrade the operating system e When exiting the operating system always shut down the computer e The behavior of the board and the personal computer when the personal computer enters the power save mode differs according to the operating system For details of error codes and messages when the power save mode set by a user or a program is entered refer to the following appendix gt Page 278 Appendix 14 Upgrading the operating system is not supported Install SW1DNC CCIEF B by following the procedure shown below 1 Uninstall SW1DNC CCIEF B 2 Upgrade the operating system 3 Install SW1DNC CCIEF B with the software version supporting the upgraded operating system 36 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Instructions for user program a Supported version of SW1DNC CCIEF B User program Supported version 32 bit version user program All versions 64 bit version user program Version 1 02C or later 4 Programs can be created and executed on the 64 bit version operating system 2 Programs can be created on the 32 bit version operating system however the following screen appears and cannot be executed lt When using Windows XP 32 bit version gt C MELSECWTEST exe lt When using Windows 7 32 bit version gt a The version of this file is not compatible with the version of Windows you re running Check
58. a slave station check the following items Item Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station ON In Network Configuration Setting of the master station is a Slave station specified as a reserved station In Network Configuration Setting of the master station is RX RY Setting or RWw RWr Setting for slave stations configured Do the station numbers set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station match those set for corresponding slave stations Do the station types set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station match those set for the connected slave stations Is the station number of CC Link IE Field Network board duplicated with the station number of other station Is the board hardware operating normally Corrective action If the D LINK LED is flashing or OFF perform the troubleshooting Page 198 Section 16 7 11 2 Cancel the reserved station setting of the slave station Page 172 Section 16 2 2 Set RX RY or RWw RWr data for each slave station within the allowable range Page 172 Section 16 2 2 Correct the station number s Correct the station types set in Network Configuration Setting of the master station Change the duplicated station number Perform the board test 1 gt Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 202 Section 16 8 For the troubleshooting for the specific symptoms ref
59. and PORT2 to the switching hub e Although the loopback function is disabled the network is configured in ring topology e Although the loopback function is enabled the network is configured in star topology e The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology Isn t the station number duplicated with any of other stations Is the board hardware operating normally 198 Corrective action e If an error occurred on the master station solve the error e Check if the master station is performing data link with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and perform the corrective action gt Page 145 Section 13 2 e When the master station and submaster station are the module other than the MELSEC iQ R series and there is a local station of the MELSEC iQ R series module refer to the following Page 38 Section 2 6 Check if the other station s power is turned ON e Check the cables and wiring Page 190 Section 16 7 3 e Perform a loop test _ Page 59 Section 4 7 1 e Perform a cable test lt _ gt Page 61 Section 4 7 2 Configure a ring topology without connecting the switching hub e Correct the wiring L gt Page 26 Section 2 2 e The system does not contain a switching hub e When not using the loopback function Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any stations on the network either PORT1 or PORT2 The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start e
60. another screen Then press the keys to bring it to the front For Windows Server 2003 R2 one of the screens shown on the left is displayed at the first installation Click the __ Ye _ button 175 UONE E SU SIUM BAI OOJJO JOU S UBBJOS OU UO p ejds p uonoy Z OL UONe e SUIUN UOHe e Su 10 Buooyse qnos Z 9 176 Security Alert Driver Installation E The driver software you are installing for E2SocketGOT has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The signature contains a time stamp However the time stamp could not be verified Do you still want to install this driver software More Info Security Alert Driver Installation The driver software you are installing for MELSEC CC Link IE Field Controller has not been properly signed with Authenticode T M technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem certificate signing or issuer has expired Do you still want to install this driver software Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web
61. b2 bi bO addresses Ry Rx RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX o 0000H F E pn c Bplalgatetz7z tie6ti s5tt44i3 4 244 0 RX RX RX RX Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx RX Rx RX Rx Rx RX 1023 03FFH 3FFF 3FFE 3FFD 3FFC 3FFB 3FFA 3FF9 3FF8 3FF7 3FF6 3FF5 3FF4 3FF3 3FF2 3FF1 3FFO 2 Remote output RY Address 1024 to 2047 0400H to 07FFH The areas to store the value of RY The RY start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RY offset size information 7 Page 224 Appendix 2 2 2 oO Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RY Buffer memory b15 b14 b143 b412 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY ome e E E e E E e e e e E E E 2047 07FFH RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY RY 3FFF 3FFE 3FFD 3FFC 3FFB 3FFA 3FF9 3FF8 3FF7 3FF6 3FF5 3FF4 3FF3 3FF2 3FF1 3FFO 222 APPENDIX 3 Remote register RWw Address 2048 to 10239 0800H to 27FFH The areas to store the value of RWw The RWw start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RWw offset size information gt Page 225 Appendix 2 2 3 Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO addresses 2048 0800H zoo ooo M ozar O RE O 4 Remote register RWr
62. batch monitor gt lt For 16 point register monitor gt Device Setting i Device Setting a Device Device Type Device Type Device Type LW direct link register v Device Type i i YPE ER extension file register v Network Ne ie 1 DeviceNo HEX C DEC C OCT 00000000 DeviceNo C HEX DEC C OCT jo Register Device List Bit device Word device Double Word device Xx 0000 LW1 00000000 Y 0000 a Cancel B 00000000 ns tse Execute Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set a type of device to be monitored e Enter a block number for ER Device Type e Enter a network number for LX LY LB LW LSB and LSW e Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG Set a start number of the device to be monitored Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal Register Device List Display a list of registered devices 2 Clickthe Execute button Screen button Setting button Adds the items set for Device Type and Device No to Register Device List Change button Sets the setting of the device selected in Register Device List to the settings set for Device Type and Device No Delete button Deletes the setting of the device selected in Register Device List Point Devices that can be monitored with 16 point register monitor The only devices that can be monitored using th
63. clicking the Browse button Select a workspace Workspace Project List l er ere The display is switched to the project list by double clicking Workspace s 2 foJd Bunsixy Buiuado Z 6 Workspace Name Display the selected workspace name Project Name Display the selected project name Title Display the title of the selected project 2 Clickthe _ button The specified project is displayed Screen button Bee button Displays the Browse For Folder screen Point Workspace A workspace is a folder of CC IE Field Utility dedicated to manage multiple projects under the same name Do not change the workspace configuration using an application such as Windows Explorer Network drive display on the Browse For Folder screen When the network drive display is not displayed log on to Windows as a user who has an access authority to the assigned folder 103 9 3 Saving Projects Save a project in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer 1 Saving projects under the specified name Save the open project under the specified name Screen display Project gt Save As Save As Save Folder Path L Documents and Settings PiMy Documents Browse Workspace Project List Workspace2 Workspace Name Workspace Project Name Title cme Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Enter the folder drive path where the
64. completion gt 3 The result is displayed on Test Result field lf the test completes abnormally check the error cause Mode Loop Test Start Test Test Result Loop Test was normaly completed n Pa on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen process the error gt Page 145 Section 13 2 lt Abnormal completion gt Test Result Loop Test was abnormaly completed Point During the loop test data link stops on all stations When a faulty station cannot be displayed on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen The following errors may have occurred e Master station duplication e Station number duplication e Slave station type error When the faulty station is a module identify the error causes on the System Monitor screen in GX Works2 When the faulty station is a board identify the error causes on the Board Diagnostics screen lt Page 143 Section 13 1 60 4 7 2 Cable test CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Cable test checks if the Ethernet cables are properly connected Only an Ethernet cable connected to the PORT1 or PORT2 of the target station is tested For the whole network status check the loop test gt Page 59 Section 4 7 1 Cable Test Cable Test Contents p Station Setting Network No 1 Station No 2 4 Execute Test Testing cable status between testing station and equipment connected to testing station port Cable Test Result
65. correct 111 10 2 1 Network type and mode The following explains network types and modes of parameter 1 Network type The following types can be selected Item Description CC IE Field Master Station Use as a master station in the CC Link IE Field Network CC IE Field Local Station Use as a local station in the CC Link IE Field Network 2 Mode Selectable items for the mode are different depending on the network type a Master station The following modes can be selected Item Description This mode performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission without losing their inherent speed performance This mode is suitable for a system that performs I O control and analog control Online Normal Mode l er and transmits large amount of data for management monitoring and diagnostics by transient transmission Use this mode for general applications This mode preferentially performs cyclic transmission for high speed communications This mode is Online High Speed suitable for a system to achieve I O control analog control and digital I O at high speed Mode Note that the maximum points assigned to RWw RWr is 256 points per local station In this mode the processing speed of transient transmission is slower than that in Online Normal Mode Offline Select this mode to disconnect the station from the network for stopping data link with other stations For the differences in cyclic transmission between Online
66. data at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING D247H D248H D249H D24AH D24BH D24CH D24DH D24EH D24FH D250H D251H Incorrect channel used for the e For the SEND instruction set 1 or 2 for the target channel No in the control data dedicated instruction e For the REMFR REMTO instruction set any of 1 to 32 for the channel No e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action Double dedicated instructions e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected received properly e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation Incorrect transient data e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the target station s CPU type at the request source of the dedicated Target station s CPU type error instruction and retry the operation dedicated instruction e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct th
67. e If no response is received for several link scans the station is determined to be a cyclic transmission faulty station b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SWOOBO t Data link status Suey i O SW00B7 12 r 26 25 26 23 2021 20 10 18 17 o 24 3 42 41 40 30 3657 605 38 8 eo re 2 each station 59 s6 57 s6 55 5 s0 52 s1 50 40 rrs 74 73 7271 70 6 les ler e6 os 21 c0 29 e a7 se 5 24 0 a2 ot Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the setting status of the reserved station 0 Other than reserved station also includes stations specified as reserved station disable status 1 Reserved station b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 swooce 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 54 2 2 1 swooc 32 34 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 28 22 21 20 19 18 17 swooca 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 swoocs 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 SWO00CO swooca 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 to Da a swoocs 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 O swoocz Pecication swoocs 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105
68. eee ventana 9 HOWGTOUSETAIS MANUAL Z gece oe ee eek et gee cee ey eee en ame oat ae 16 TERR S hereto rarer Aa E TNE T RR E cee RA NE AO ei oh a cen Ine Oe are PAE ey tg 18 PPA IN Gee S pasar ca cee ec hee tale cit Ro etd T Are Nn te Me eh A eae A hn A E 20 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 21 11 COLIN IE Feld NGWOlKasacacvsceteucesdatarueeectew sens uedstaees F uasseeu 21 1 2 CC Link IE Field Network Board 0 0 0 ccc ee een teens 23 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 25 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link IE Field Network Board 02005 25 2 2 Single Network System an aaau n naana naana 26 2 3 Mult i Network System a an aana anaana aaaea aa 32 24 Network ComponentS assau eeaeee 33 2AN AE E cere ie se ea ETE E EEE ET 33 242 Peserta aee a e Ar a e 33 2 5 Operating Environment 00 0000 anaana eenaa aeee 34 2 6 Precautions for Use 5c eta nb cnatwnc duis aana 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 39 3 1 General Specifications uaaa aa aaae 39 3 2 Performance Specifications nananana aaaeeeaa 40 3 3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses na ananuna anaana cee ee eens 41 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 44 4 1 Procedure Before OperdtiOns lt coscesaek co auauua 44 42 PatNamMeS e cc o2s3 5s ny agaseas ton EAEE Ea oes ee E E E R E R RE aes 45 4 3 instalation p ac cacec eo o hed ood ube ade e ooh piate phe ee oeaetereenaaeaeeteees 48 A231 Handling PrECaGIONS 62sec cs cota ate whde thon tta E oa
69. effective for reducing conducted noise in the 10MHz or less frequency Use of a noise filter can suppress noise The installation precautions are described below e Do not bundle the cables on the input side and output side of the noise filter If bundled the output side noise will be induced into the filtered cable on the input side Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Induction Filter E Output side device side Output side device side Noise will be induced when the input Separately install the input and and output cables are bundled output cables s3 A L90310 ADVLIOA MO1 ANY OWS y Xipueddy e Ground the ground terminal of the noise filter to the ground point of the control panel with the shortest ground wire possible approximately 10cm 1 2311q Lg o oA MoJ y YUM Ajdo 0 Sainseay Zp xXipueddy Appendix 14 2 Measures to comply with the Low Voltage Directive The CC Link IE Field Network board is out of the requirement for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive since it does not use the power supply in the range of 50 to 1000V AC and 75 to 1500V DC 281 Appendix 15External Dimensions Appendix 15 1 as0BD J71GF11 T2 282 175 18 5 unit mm APPENDIX Appendix 15 2 a81BD J71GF11 T2 1 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Standard size 175 181 unit mm Z1 lLADLZP GEl80 Z S xipueddy SUOISUBUIG
70. enact 91 CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CC IE FIELD UTILITY 92 Tl OVON erar ETEA e Eae a a EE a a E EE a 92 T2 Men SE ee eee eee eee ee ee Redwee eee ee nee ee eda ne ie eee eee 93 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 95 8 1 Starting and Exiting 2 0 0 eee eee nas 95 8 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations 0 20 0 0 ccc eee eee 96 8 2 1 Main frame configuration 0 0 0 0 eaea eeaeee 96 O22 TOL song ay bed voor snecarsnore san eued Hoeeharanoowsenseserecstuerewons 97 829 WokwihNdowS cesec tog ca eras tn arcs ees ed a creat esha panos Gena ee ane ads 99 89 Help PUNCHOM o 5 sces cone erase as rears es Sere RE ree SHE eg es a SPE Eh en Boe PO oH 101 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 102 91 Creating Projects 5 2244200e 240306 benuopew ewes tceeesew EEE cere hee e es 102 9 2 Opening Existing Projects aaua anaana annaua eee eee eens 103 11 12 93 Saving Pioleels cscucanedeteceeeecereue recess cemeeeeeess 9 4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects 9 5 Deleting Projects 2 cic set otedeubcdeende dod eeud tees be coe 96 Closing PTOIGUNS 2 s c cc cee pete bes bee tee ere bes bet tee eee oe 9 7 Verifying Project Data 2 2 5 225 520c6ueeus debe cdbned nendoea CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 1 Parameter List 2 054se006 0 sd625 56566086 6445 6 ESS 664 es ob cs 10 2 Setting Network Parameter 0 0 0 00 e eee eee ee 10 2 1 Network type and MOdGi i cs ntorrce
71. explains the screen configuration and basic operations of Device Monitor Utility 12 2 1 Start and completion The following explains the operating method to start end the utility 1 Start Start Device Monitor Utility a Start from CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 Z Online gt Device Monitor Utility b Start from the Windows start Operating procedure 1 Z Start of Windows gt MELSEC gt Device Monitor Utility 1 Start screen All apps or Start All Programs 2 Completion End Device Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 Menu gt Exit UO e dwWOd pue eS 1 77 Aun JOWUO BdIA9q JO suoneJsado ISeg pue uonesn yuon UBEIDS ZZ 131 12 2 2 Screen configuration and basic operations The following explains the screen configuration of Device Monitor Utility Screen display Title bar gt RQUE Teen euiiey Menu bar p Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Ss ne 1 0 Yo026 0 Yo06 0036 0 Device information i 1 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 181 CC IE Field Data Format The Channel Information in the Current Display Screen Network status i Network No O Station No 255 kai Display method Vertical indication Display contents Item Description Title bar Display a project name Menu bar Display menu options for executing ea
72. for Accessing Redundant CPU System This section explains precautions for accessing a redundant CPU system via CC Link IE Controller Network or MELSECNET H network using the CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Redundant CPU specification When the system control system standby system system A system B of the Redundant CPU is specified to access the Redundant CPU the Logical station No set on the Target setting screen of the CC IE Field Utility is used for access For the Logical station No setting refer to the following section K gt Page 121 Section 10 2 6 gt Network Parameter CC JE Field Target Setting Board No 1 Logical Station No Multiple PLG Redundant FLE a iN Speetfcation Control System B D Clear Check End Cancel W JS S Nda uepunp y Puiss 2dy 104 suoNed ld xiIpueddy 215 2 Operation at occurrence of system switching When system switching occurs during access to the Redundant CPU access to the Redundant CPU set for the Logical station No is continued Example When the following Logical station No 66 was specified for access Logical station No 66 Network No 1 Station No 1 Multiple PLC Not specified Redundant PLC Control system Before system switching After system switching 216 Station No 4 CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module Station No 5 CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H Network No 2 Network No 1
73. function to check if the data of the projects are the same or to check the changed parameter locations To verify data in the board perform the board verification gt Page 127 Section 11 3 Screen display Project gt Verify Verify Destination Project Workspace Folder Path Workspace Name Project Name Title Execute Cancel Operating procedure 1 Click the _2 _ button to set the verify destination project Item Description Verify Destination Project Display the path to the workspace of the verify destination Display the workspace name of the verify destination Display the project name of the verify destination Display the project title of the verify destination 2 Clickthe Execute button The verify result is displayed on the Verify Result screen Es Verify Result Project Verify Parameter ex Source Project Name Destination Project Name Project1 Source Data Name Network Parameter Destination Data Name ejeq p fold BulAWeA 2 6 Verify Result Mismatch in Number of Boards of CC IE Field Setting There were 1 parts not matched Unmatch Line Ui 109 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS This chapter explains the parameter setting items and operations on the setting screens in CC IE Field Utility For writing set parameters to a board refer to _ gt Page 126 Section 11 2 1 0 1 Parameter List The following table shows the list of CC Link IE
74. link continues with the stations that are operating normally Line topology tnetoroiogy Stations after the faulty station Master station Station No 0 are disconnected T S i TOPE 4 CEEECETLET Ring topology The system will continue data link among normal stations only Master station Station No 0 Onn Wa SAS YIOMION B HulS zZz 2 3 Precautions a Connecting devices to the same network To a switching hub on CC Link IE Field Network do not connect an Ethernet device e g personal computer on a network other than CC Link IE Field Network Doing so will cause timeout in the master station resulting in disconnection among all stations b Configuration in which data link cannot be performed incorrect ring topology Point I Do not wire devices as shown below Doing so will cause an error in all stations and data link cannot be performed e Connecting both PORT1 and PORT2 to the switching hub Cannot connect both Ethernet ports to the switching hub 28 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION c Ring topology To configure a network in ring topology set Use for Loopback Function Setting in the Network Parameter screen for the master station 7 Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 When a module is used for the master station check if the module version supports the loopback function MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual Point Configuring a networ
75. link devices RX RWr of the master station board are stored in the driver by link refresh The status of driver are stored in the user program by MD function 67 3 Coexistence of local stations and the other slave stations other than local stations The data of all slave stations are also stored in the local stations in the same way as the master station eM SS m mnnm pr x A Station number 0 Station number 1 Station number2 Station number3 I I 12 1 1 1 I i 1 I out Master station Slave station 11 Slave station 11 Local station I Board l i E i 1 I I I T RX RWr i RX RWr T RX RWr I ser I Il II I l program Station annann na AANA E S aopodoooc EEHHEHHEEEHEHEHEP if I l rom station i i I I moari l number 1 1 RX RWr 5 l i i Station i i Send range I F bonnnonnagunnadannanaanannnnnannnanannnn t n from station i MD function number 2 J i number 2 amp i I I 1 1 I Station ee o EERE EEEREEESE 1 1 number 3 M l d l 1 1 I Link refresh E l i 1 RYRWw ot I l ETA I T r Driver to station Station number 1 number 1 Send range i to station I l number 2 I Send range Send range 1 i to station from station I number 3 I en T number 3 Y b I x MH Area for sending to other stations 4 Setting method The link devices can be assigned in Network Configuration Setting lt gt
76. not completed SB0001 is OFF Link stop completion SB0053 ON Stop completed SB0001 is ON status own station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF 231 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Turns ON when a cyclic transmission start request by System link start SBO002 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0002 is OFF System link start SB0054 ON Start accepted SB0002 is ON request accept status Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the System link start request accept status SB0054 turns ON and cyclic transmission start is completed OFF Start not completed SBO002 is OFF System link start SB0055 ON Start completed SB0002 is ON completion status Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when a cyclic transmission stop request by System link stop SB0003 is accepted OFF Not accepted SB0003 is OFF System link stop SB0056 ON Stop accepted SBO003 is ON request accept status Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the System link stop accept status SBO056 turns ON and cyclic transmission stop is completed OFF Stop not completed SB0003 is OFF System link stop SB0057 ON Stop completed SBO003 is ON x completion status Condi
77. or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions WARNING Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction Do not touch any connectors while power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction CAUTION Use the board in an environment that meets the general specifications in this manual Failure to do SO may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the board Do not disassemble or modify the board Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or board resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction Install
78. points to RX RY per station 64 points to RWw RWr per station and the number of connected stations is increased Link scan time ms Total b Online High speed mode Total number of points number Online Network Operation Setting l for link devices of Network Operation Setting PA ET Normal mode Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input bytes Hold input Data RX RY Data RX RY Normal mode l High speed mode_Input data OFF A High speed mode_Input data held Link scan time ms 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 Total number of stations 260 APPENDIX Appendix Comparison of CC Link and CC Link IE Field Network This section explains the differences in the specifications between CC Link Ver 2 board and CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Performance specifications comparison a Transmission and interface specifications Specifications Item CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link IE Field Network board Riv 2048 po Maximum link points per 8192 points al G Master 8192 points aod Ce 16384 points number of send g 4 8192 points 1 16384 points 4 1 Online Normal mode 1024 points points per Local RWw 128 points l l statan Online High speed mode 256 points station RY 896 points 2048 points Communication Selectable from 156kbps 625kbps 2 5Mbps T speed 5Mbps 10Mbps P i aad PEGAL E An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE T Connection e CC Link dedicate
79. screen is displayed Display contents Item Description Monitor Status Display current monitor status Board List Board No Display the board number of each board Channel No Display the channel number of each board Network No Display the network number set for each board Station No Display the station number set for each board Transmission Status Display communication status of each board Latest Error Code Display the latest error code of board Link Refresh Display the maximum minimum and current time of link refresh Board Information Channel No Select a board channel number of a test target or information display target Model Name Display a model name of the selected board Product Information Display product information of the selected board Board Test Execute a test on the selected board 143 peog Buisoubeiq p er 144 Operating procedure 1 Click the Start Monitor button and start monitoring Click the Stop Monitor button to stop monitoring Set a board channel number of a test target or information display target Select a test mode for Mode Click the Start Test button Start the board test A result is displayed in the Test result field Screen button e Diagnostics button Displays the CC IE Field Network Diagnostics screen gt Page 147 Section 13 2 2 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 Diagnosing CC Link IE Field Network This section e
80. site with your permission Head our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only Click Next to continue Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller If your hardware came with an installation CD QP or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do For Windows Server 2003 R2 the screen shown on the left is displayed Click the Yes button and continue the installation For Windows Server 2003 R2 the screen shown on the left is displayed Click the Yes button and continue the installation For operating system of Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later the confirmation screen for connection to Windows Update may be displayed Select No not this time and click the button The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed after the board installation Refer to Section 16 2 4 and install the driver When the utility has been started up restart the utility after installing the driver CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 2 4 When the driver is not installed The driver is installed automatically when installing the board on the personal computer after installing the software package For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the following operation is required Found New Hardware Wizard 1 Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps
81. state of computer Channel 18x Mcciefx Busxx Board error was detected by the hardware self diagnosis 2 For information events Event ID 1024 0400H 1025 0401H 1026 0402H 1027 0403H 194 Description Driver started normally Channel 18x Mcciefx Busxx Board reset was executed Network parameter was updated State information was updated Corrective action Refer to the troubleshooting when the board WDT error occurred Page 182 Section 16 4 1 e Restart the personal computer e Refer to the troubleshooting when the Hardware error occurred Page 182 Section 16 4 1 Change the power option not to entering the sleep mode hibernation mode or enabling fast startup and restart the personal computer e Check the board installation status and reinstall the board after shutdown in case of an abnormal installation e Check the personal computer operating status and repair or replace the personal computer in case of an abnormal operation e If an error occurs while using ftServer consult Stratus Technologies Inc e Restart the personal computer e Refer to the troubleshooting when the Hardware error occurred Page 182 Section 16 4 1 The following information event logs other than errors are displayed in the system log of the event viewer The corrective actions are not required for the following events Output timing At driver startup At board reset Except for bo
82. station is set as an error invalid station even if it is disconnected from the network during data link the master station will not detect it as error station Furthermore by the temporary error invalid station setting function a slave station can be temporarily set as an error invalid station 1 Error invalid station setting A slave station can be set as an error invalid station in Network Configuration Setting Page 113 Section 10 2 2 Th J LEE jag Slave station Slave station Slave station Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Necetailiaicerre rm itbadeieeetcon this station even in the case of an error or power OFF Master station Station No 0 Error invalid station Network Configuration Setting RWIRY Setting JNU Setting Number 2 PLCs Station Mo Station Type Reserved Error Invalid Station pot focal Station A ie ooon oor al oon coor No Setting x hia Sekine a A E O cons poor Co a intelligent Device Station te oo20 ooz 8 ooo Select Invalid Station 2 Temporary error invalid station This function is useful for various operations such as replacing a slave station during a data link by temporarily gt Page 164 Section 13 2 8 setting it as an error invalid station For details refer to 84 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 7 Event Function This function checks event conditions every link scan and notifies events to t
83. station to the destination station Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Canfirmation Set Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q81BD J7 GF CD o ovine MAC Address Module Error _ Network Event History pyiccess the network the event history log RR fserved Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations Display error occurrence Enable Disable View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily Ignore Station Errors ignore station errors Error details Selected station No 0 Detailed Information Network Event History List No Event occurrence date and time Event detected station 2011 01 07 14 57 30 Master Station lt lt Own 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station Total Number of Received Data on PORT1 side 4450409 Total Number of Received Data on PORT2 side 0 Own Station Connecting Status Normal Communicating on PORTI side Cable Disconnected on PORT2 side Reason for Transmission Interruption None Reason for Data Link Stop Station Type Mismatch 0023 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station 0022 2011 01 07 14 56 11 Master Station 0021 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Station 0020 2011 01 07 14 56 00 Master Station 0019 201
84. stop request for the own station Range 125 master station 1 to 120 local station The cyclic transmission stop request is performed by System link stop SB0003 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the own station s status OOH No module mounted 01H STOP Normal 02H STOP Stop error occurring 03H STOP Continuation error occurring 04H RUN Normal 05H RUN Continuation error occurring 06H STEP RUN 07H PAUSE OEH Reset in progress OFH Initial processing Stores the parameter status 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 203 Section 16 9 O Conditions e This is enabled when the Received parameter error SB004D is ON Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by Link start own O station SB0000 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt gt Page 203 Section 16 9 When Link start own station SB0000 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by Link stop own station SBO001 0 Normal 1 or higher Abnormal lt gt Page 203 Section 16 9 When Link stop own station SB0001 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF APP
85. subject to change without notice
86. the PORT2 The count stores only error data that is not transmitted to all stations When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online Stores the cumulative count that error data was received at the PORT2 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned ON the stored count is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online O e This is enabled when the Mode status SW0043 is 0 or 1 during online po APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local A station station Stores the REMFR REMTO execution status for each channel SWO0080 Channel 1 SW008B Channel 12 SW0096 Channel 23 SW0081 Channel 2 SWOO08C Channel 13 SWO0097 Channel 24 SW0082 Channel 3 SW008D Channel 14 SW0098 Channel 25 SW0083 Channel 4 SWOO8E Channel 15 SW0099 Channel 26 SW0084 Channel 5 SWOO8F Channel16 SWOO9A Channel 27 SW0080 SwWo0085 Channel6 SWO0O090 Channel17 SW009B Channel 28 i Execution status O O SW0086 Ch I7 SW0091 Ch 118 W h 12 REMFR REMTO anne anne SW009C Channel 29 SWOO9F SWO0087 Channel 8 SWO0092 Channel19 SWOO9D Channel 30 SW0088 SW0089 SWO008A Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 SW0093 SW0094 SW0095 Channel 20 Channel 21 Channel 22 SWOO9E SWOO9F Channel 31 Channel 32 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal comple
87. the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard Section 2 5 Operating Environment Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer Incorrect insertion of the board may cause malfunction failure or drop of the board When installing the board take care not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member When installing the board take care not to contact with other boards Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction Wiring Precautions WARNING Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board or starting wiring Failure to do so may result in electric shock damage to the product or malfunction After installation of the board and wiring attach the cover on the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock CAUTION Place the communication cable connected to the board in a duct or clamp them If not dangling ca
88. the cables and wiring gt Page 190 Section 16 7 3 e Perform a cable test gt Page 61 Section 4 7 2 Is the connected other station normal Check if the other station s power is turned ON Are cables and wiring normal Change the mode of the master station to the online mode lt Page 111 Section 10 2 Is the mode of the master station set to the online mode Is the installation environment within the specifications l l l e Check the installation environment gt Page 190 Section 16 7 1 Is there any noise influence When the loopback function is enabled check if the ring topology is Is the loopback function enabled for the master station correctly configured for the port where the L ERR LED is on gt Page 28 Section 2 2 3 b Is the board hardware operating normally Perform the board test _ Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 4 LINK LED is turned OFF This indicates a status in which the board can not communicate link down Check Corrective action NN 7 e Check the cables and wiring L gt Page 190 Section 16 7 3 Oo Are cables and wiring normal Perform a cable test gt Page 61 Section 4 7 2 Q 3 Oo Is the connected other station normal Check if the other station s power is turned ON a aS Is the board hardware operating normally Perform the board test gt Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 2 U8 nN Si n 199 16 7 12 Ch
89. the own station is a master station or not OFF Not master station ON Master station This stores if the own station is a local station or not OFF Not local station ON Local station Conditions e This is enabled when the Station setting own station 1 SB0044 is OFF Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible OFF Normal ON Error If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by the Baton pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption 0 SW0048 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Baton pass status own station SW0047 and Cause of baton pass interruption SW0048 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local A station station Stores the own station s data link status OFF Normal ON Error Data link status SB0049 If an error occurs the cause of the error can be checked by Cause of data link own station stop SW0049 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Cause of data link stop SW0049 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan NANE Stores the continuation error status of the own station s CPU module Own station s CPU SB004A OFF Normal status 1 ON Continuation error es Stores the stop error status of the own station s CPU module Own station s CPU SB004B OFF Normal status 2 ON Stop error Stores the RU
90. transmission check the following items Item Is there any ambient temperature or noise influence Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station ON Does the error occur on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Corrective action Check the installation environment 1 gt Page 190 Section 16 7 1 Check the LED and take corrective action in the case of LERR LED turned ON Page 199 Section 16 7 11 3 When an error occurred on PORT1 and PORT2 perform cable and self loopback tests Page 54 Section 4 5 4 Page 61 Section 4 7 2 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 202 Section 16 8 186 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 6 Troubleshooting for Device Access The following shows the troubleshooting when an error occurred in the network data link e Cyclic transmission cannot be performed Page 187 Section 16 6 1 e Transient transmission cannot be performed K Page 188 Section 16 6 2 16 6 1 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and the cyclic transmission cannot be performed e The output of the own station does not reach the accessed station e The change of the input from the accessed station does not reach the own station e An unexpected value is set to the link device When cyclic data are not delivered to the master or
91. yIOMJOU BulydeUuyD E 1 Z 9L 16 8 Information Required for Inquiries When the troubleshooting cannot solve the problem or a board failure occurs please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative Inform the following conditions and situations when inquiring the problems 1 Product information Item Condition Situation Reference Model Q8OBD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Board Rating plate Page 264 Appendix 9 Product es Product information version Model SW1DNC CCIEF Version __ _ Personal Manufacturer computer name Personal computer name Example Intel Core 2 Duo Processor 3GHz Personal CPU Page 34 Section 2 5 computer Memoysee CS Operating Example Windows XP Professional system If exist type the number of boards and so on Other Existence option Situation checked with disconnecting other option boards boards 2 2 Failure content Item Condition Situation Example The LINK LED does not turn on even though the computer is turned on Failure description Occurrence frequency If the failure occurs only in the specific case inform the occurrence condition noticed Occurrence condition Inform the following descriptions e The result of troubleshooting performed e The situation when checking with other boards or computers Example Event ID 295 The Board WDT error had occurred error is displayed on the event viewer when the personal co
92. you install software for Network Controller C If your hardware came with an installation CD Sy or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Puy ta Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D Drivers x86 Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Cancel End The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed after installing the board and starting up the personal computer Select Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click the button Select Search for the best driver in these locations lt For 32 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x86 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x86 lt For 64 bit version operating system gt Check Include this location in the search and specify Drivers x64 of the CD ROM drive to be used Example D Drivers x64 1 The o
93. 1 01 07 14 56 00 Master Station 0018 2011 01 07 14 55 41 laste ion 0017 2011 01 07 14 55 41 0016 2011 01 07 14 55 41 Mast ion 0015 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Station The station type of the hast station does not match the one set in the master station 0014 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Station meters 0013 2011 01 07 14 55 04 Master Station 0012 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Clear Event History Refresh Close History Acquisition Setting Create csv ple Troubleshooting Correct the station type in the master station parameter to match the station type of the host station and then write parameters to the PLC CPU and reset the master station CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 System Configuration Using CC Link IE Field Network Board A system configuration when using the CC Link IE Field Network board which is installed to a personal computer is shown below Connect Connect Ethernet CC Link IE Field cable Network system Personal computer Install CC Link IE Field Network board SW1DNC CCIEF B pueog WOMEN PIO II AUNT 09 Bulsy uoesnByuog WS S pZ 25 2 2 Single Network System 1 Overall system configuration Single network system is a system that consists of a master station and slave stations connected by Ethernet cables as shown below Up to 120 slave s
94. 2 5048H number 1 is stored valid invalid flag 0 Invalid 1 Valid 20553 5049H 20554 504AH 20555 504BH 20556 504C The own station s information is stored 20557 to 20566 504DH to 5056H 20567 to 20568 5057H to 5058H OHO P CEM information 20569 to 20575 5059H to 505FH i 3 Other station information station number 2 to 120 Address 20576 to 24383 5060H to 5F3FH The information for station number 2 to 120 is stored in the same order as the information for other station UOIJEWJOJU UONEIS JOUIO y zZ Xxipuaddy sessolppy Aiowsyy yng jo sjielagq Zz xipueddy network card information station number 1 and other station controller information station number 1 22 Appendix 3 Link Special Relay SB List A link special relay SB is turned ON OFF depending on various factors at data link Any error status of the data link can be confirmed by using and monitoring it in the program 1 Application of the link special relay SB By using link special relays SB the status of the CC Link IE Field Network can be checked 2 Ranges of areas that are turned ON OFF by users and by the system The following is a range when the link special relays SB are assigned from SB0000 to SBO1FF e Range turned ON OFF by users SB0000 to SB001F e Range turned ON OFF by the system SBO020 to SBO1FF 3 Link Special Relay SB List A list of link special relays SB when they are assigned from SB0000 to SBO1F
95. 2 MITSUBISHI W ELECTRIC Mitsubishi PC Interface Board MELSEG CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCIEF B Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly Note that these precautions apply only to this product Refer to the user s manual of your CPU module for safety precautions on programmable controller systems In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION A N WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to m e e e ee ee ew SS SS SS serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions WARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operate
96. 30 to SW0137 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame is received at the master station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at each station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT1 error frame detection each station SW0140 to SW0147 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Availability Master Local station station i pr i pr d Number PORT1 error frame SB0141 detection master station PORT2 error frame SB0150 detection each station PORT2 error frame SB0151 detection master station Parameter error status SB0170 each station Reserved station SB0180 function disable status APPENDIX Availability Description Stores if an error frame was received from power on unt
97. 4 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swoorol16 15 14 13 12 11 10 esI 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swoot1 3231 30 20 26 27 26 25 24 29 22 21 20 19 16 17 reserved staton SWoorzfas Tar as fas aa as faz far faofao fas far aefa foa fas E DA swoo1a ea fos 6 61 eo fso 50 67 se Tss fsa 52 s2181 fso fs se temporary error invalid ee 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 74 70 69 68 67 66 65 WOOT ton acting swoots 36 os Toa e302 T1 e022 ee 67 e 24 aa ea ot swoot6fs1a r11 110 109 109 107 106 105 104 103 102 107 100 99 98 97 swoot7 rao 19 1 19 117 st6 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents station No Conditions e Some stations cannot be specified as reserved station function disable or temporary error invalid station setting cancel lt gt Page 163 Section 13 2 7 Page 164 Section 13 2 8 e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Specifies the number of resends for the REMFR REMTO instruction 0 0 times default Outside the above Number of times that is set Number of resends SWO001A x REMFR REMTO os Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Specifies the response wait time for the REMFR REMTO instruction 0 10 seconds default Saa Outside the above Number of seconds that is set Response wait timer SW001B REMFR REMTO Conditions e This is enabled when t
98. 41 2011 01 07 14 55 41 2011 01 07 14 55 41 2011 01 07 14 55 04 2011 01 07 14 55 04 2011 01 07 14 55 04 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 00 Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Link up or link down lt lt Own St gt gt Status change Data link status
99. 433 for 18432 to 18463 read and write 1024 to 2047 800H to 27FFH Remote register RWw Appendix 2 1 Link special relay SB 4800H to 481FH e 18434 to 18463 for read only e 18464 to 18495 for 18464 to 18975 read and write 4820H to 4A1FH EAP RCIE IRAE tt 18496 to 18975 for read only 18976 to 19455 System area 4A20H to 4BFFH oo oO 19456 Station No 1 RX offset D 4C00n o 19457 W Station No 1 RX size S 4C01H Page 224 to RX offset size information Read Appendix 3 19694 2 2 1 Station No 120 RX offset lt 4CEEn gt o 19695 D Station No 120 RX size 7 4CEFh p 19696 to 19711 System area E 4CFOH to 4CFFH 19712 Station No 1 RY offset 4D00H 19713 Station No 1 RY size 4D01H Page 224 to RY offset size information Read Appendix 19950 l 2 2 2 Station No 120 RY offset 4DEEn 19951 Station No 120 RY size 4DEF H 19952 to 19967 System area x 4DFOH to 4DFFH 41 Address Decimal Hexadecimal 19968 4E00H 19969 4E01H to 20206 4EEEn 20207 4EEFH 20208 to 20223 4EFOH to 4EFFH 20224 4F00H 20225 4F01H to 20462 4FEEH 20463 4FEFH 20464 to 20511 4FFOH to 501FH 20512 5020H 20513 5021H 20514 5022H 20515 5023H 20516 to 20519 5024H to 5027h 20520 5028H 20521 5029H 20522 502AH 20523 502BH 20524 502CH 20525 to 20534 502DH to 5036H 20535 t
100. 45 SB0047 230 Reserved station function disable request Reserved station specification enable request RECV execution request flag 1 RECV execution request flag 2 Network type own station Mode own station Station setting own station 1 Station setting own station 2 Baton pass status own station Stores the network type of own station O ON Field Network Availability Description Master Local station station Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are temporarily canceled from reserved stations OFF No request ON Request issued Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are returned to reserved stations Only stations that were temporarily canceled can be returned to reserved stations OFF No request ON Request issued This stores the data reception status of the own station s channel 1 OFF No received data ON Received data found Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF This stores the data reception status of the own station s channel 2 OFF No received data ON Received data found Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the mode of own station OFF Online ON Not online This stores if
101. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Swoo07 112 114 110 109 1081107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swooos hofjes Each number in the table represents station No Specify the monitoring time until instruction completion If the direction is not completed within the time it is resent for the number of resends specified by the Number of resends RIRD RIWT SWOOOB 0 10 seconds default value 1 to 360 1 to 360 seconds swo009 Arrival monitoring time If a value outside the above settings is made operation is performed for RIRD RIWT 360 seconds If the Number of resends RIRD RIWT SWOOOB is set the time until the dedicated instruction fails is shown below Number of resends RIRD RIWT 1 x Arrival monitoring time RIRD RIWT If the instruction is not completed within the monitoring time specified by the Arrival monitoring time RIRD RIWT SWO0009 this specifies the number of times that the instruction is resent Number of resends SWOO00B 0 Not resent default value RIRD RIWT SI7 MS Ja sI6ey Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy 1 to 7 1 to 7 times If a value outside the above settings is made the instruction is resent 7 times 241 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Specifies the slave stations where reserved station function disable or temporary error invalid station setting cancel is performed 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 b1
102. 7 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 screens procedure User Account Control Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before C j Setup exe amnion Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Necsscssrscssessssssenacsssssssssensscsssssssssnasssssssssssnacssssessssssasssssesssssnassssssssssoaassssssessseanasessssessssuasesesssesssasesesssssnnasssssoseesssassssseseessaasssesessessnaasseeeess This screen is displayed when user account control is v Details enabled User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Click Allow or the Yes button Program name Setup exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer V Show details No Change when these notifications appear Click the Yes button For safety use of MELSEC Interface Board the power options of MELSECPowerManager is installed and the Windows F Windows will be changed as follows after installing Invalidating the sleep settings Changing the settings of power button action in shutdown Power Options settings are changed automatically Do you continue the installation For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following appendix lt gt Page 275 Appendix
103. 84H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error _ Page 214 1 in this section e If the own station or target station was disconnected from the network identify the cause of the disconnection and take action DOAOH Transient data transmission e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to response wait timeout Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e When the receiving station encountered overloading of transient data reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 and retry the operation Transient data transmission a DOA1H e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation completion wait timeout e Perform hardware and self loopback tests lt gt Page 53 Section 4 5 3 Page 54 Section 4 5 4 a e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation Transient data transmission ae DOA2H o e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected processing wait timeout properly e If the own station or target station was disconnected from the network identify the cause of the disconnection and take action DOA3H Transient data transmission e Correct the target station number of the transient data and retry the operation error e If the target station of the trans
104. 9968 to 20207 4E00H to 4EEFH Page 225 3 in this section 20224 to 20463 4FOOH to 4FEFH RWr offset size information Page 225 4 in this section 1 RX offset size information Address 19456 to 19695 4C00H to 4CEFH The areas to store the RX start number and number of points for each station No Buffer memory addresses 19456 4C00H 19457 4C01H 19458 4C02H 19459 4C03H 19694 4CEEH Station No 120 Offset 19695 4CEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station number can be calculated using the formula below e Offset buffer memory address 19456 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19457 station number 1 x 2 2 RY offset size information Address 19712 to 19951 4D00H to 4DEFH The areas to store the RY start number and number of points for each station No Buffer memory addresses 1e7 2440008 18743440014 18714440024 19715 40080 19950 4DEEn Station No 120 Offset 19951 4DEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station number can be calculated using the formula below e Offset buffer memory address 19712 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19713 station number 1 x 2 224 APPENDIX 3 RWw offset size information Address 19968 to 20207 4E00H to 4EEFH The areas to store the RWw start number and number of points for each st
105. A Device Monitor Utility aps CC IE Field Board Manual ps MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual CCIE Field Board Program Sample Log Off O Shut Down f CCIE Field Board Dae CCIE Field Utility Point Starting CC IE Field Utility with the validated user account control When CC IE Field Utility is started while user account control UAC is validated the following warning screen is displayed Click the Allow or Yes button to start the utility a JZ Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before 6un xg pue Bunes 1 g Program name CCIEFUTL exe nknown B CCIEFUTL exe Publisher U Unidentified Publisher File origin Network drive Show details No Change when these notifications appear gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before V Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer For details on how to prevent this screen from being displayed refer to Page 265 Appendix 11 2 Exiting Exit CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 Project gt Exit 95 8 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations This section explains the main frame basic screen of CC IE Field Utility that is displayed when it is started up 8 2 1 Main frame configuration The fol
106. CH D25DH D25EH D25FH D260H 208 Transmission completion wait timeout dedicated instruction Response timer timeout dedicated instruction Unsupported request received dedicated instruction Target station No error dedicated instruction Execution abnormal end type error dedicated instruction Request type error REQ Specified current control station not exist dedicated instruction Mode error during dedicated instruction execution Channel in use dedicated instruction Channel in use dedicated instruction Dedicated instruction error Incorrect transient data Dedicated instruction error Station type error REMFR REMTO executing station Station type error REMTO executing station Corrective action e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem The dedicated instruction did not end within the transient timeout monitoring time Send data from other station may be received or the specified target station for executing the dedicated instruction may be failed e When executing the RE
107. CV instruction check if a message is sent from another station e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change the target station at the station that sent the SEND instruction e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the target station number and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the execution abnormal end type and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the request type in the request data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the target station number and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change the mode of the master station from Loop test to Online and execute it again e If
108. Cable Status J9 Error uesesos sonsoubelp Bulkeldsiq ZZE WIOMION PI J1 4UIT OD Bulsoubeig ZE Point Station type display of the icon When modules other than the target of the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics _ Page 145 Section 13 2 are used in a local station it is displayed as Other Modules _ 151 5 Network configuration CC Link IE Field Network configuration and status of each station are displayed When the status of each station is not displayed check if master stations or station numbers are not overlapped Screen display 1 Connected St 4 2 3 Inteligent 7 Locals Display contents 1 Connected Station Indicate a station connected to the utility own station Display a network type and station number is displayed when a station number has not been set 2 Network type Station No l ye When the background of the characters is colored setting such as reserved station specification has been configured to the relevant station 3 Display a module type and station status 4 Display a port to which an Ethernet cable is connected 5 A branch of star topology configured by using a network device such as a hub a Icon By clicking an icon the station is set as a selected station and details are displayed in Selected Station Communication Status Monitor A station with an error such as master station overlap or s
109. Control Detect application installations and p Enabled eo User Account Control Only elevate executables that are sign Disabled Gio User Account Control Only elevate UlAccess applications th Enabled ig User Account Control Run all administrators in Admin Appr Enabled i User Account Control Switch to the secure desktop when pr Enabled J bie User Account Control Virtualize file and registry write failure Enabled lt m User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for F administrators in Admin Approval Mode 8 Select Elevate without prompting on the lt lt Local Security Setting gt gt tab and click the button p Prompt for credentials on the secure desktop Prompt for consent for non Windows binaries ok Ceno soy 4 Setting completed 2 1 und JOJ SPOYJ N Z LL XIpu ddy aBbessayy Buluse sMOpulIM LL xipueddy obessow Bulusem Bul Appendix 1 2Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup CC Link IE Field Network board does not support the power save mode standby hibernate sleep and fast startup The following explains the behavior of the personal computer when the personal computer enters each mode Appendix 12 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the power save mode sta
110. D is ON g A 170 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 Network access Error Description Reference The communication error occurred ERR LED is ON Flashing User program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU The board cannot perform communication while executing an An error occurred in the network user program occasionally e Page 184 Section 16 5 1 e Page 185 Section 16 5 2 e Page 185 Section 16 5 3 data link Station is disconnected from the network unexpectedly e The connected station is disconnected unexpectedly e The data cannot be read written from to the accessed station e Communication with accessed station occasionally fails e A relevant station repeats network connection and e Page 185 Section 16 5 4 disconnection The cyclic transmission cannot be performed e The output of the own station does not reach the accessed tation station e Page 187 Section 16 6 1 e The change of the input from the accessed station does not reach the own station An error occurred while accessing e An unexpected value is set to the link device the device via a network The transient transmission cannot be performed e The data cannot be written to the accessed station e The data cannot be read from the accessed station e The data cannot be monitored with the utility e The data cannot be read written while accessing to the device using a communication function with a user program e Page 188 Secti
111. D613H to D614H RWr D615H to D616H RY D617H to D618H RX D619H to D61AH D61BH to D61EH D61FH D620H D621H to D62CH D62DH D630H D701H D706H D70BH D720H Parameter error Parameter error Overlapping of the device CCPASET execution error Incorrect transient data Parameter error Failed to start data link CCPASET execution error at local station No station specified for Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting Temporary error invalid station setting cancel or reserved station function disable enable request execution error when the own station is a local station Temporary error invalid station setting cancel or reserved station function disable enable request execution error when concurrently requested to multiple stations Data link start stop instruction out of range CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Corrective action e Write the network parameters to the board again e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the link device offset or size of slave station s and retry the operation D61BH RWw D61CH RWr D61DH RY D61EH RX e Erase the network parameter settings select Write to PLC and execute the CCPASET instruction again e Check the transient data at the request source and retry the operation e If this erro
112. E E ea E 89 92 Link special register SW 45 223 Link special relay SB 0008 223 Local station 22204 aana aaa 112 284 V Version a 4 0 5 0 5 4 ce wares be pee a ee 101 133 285 REVISIONS The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Print date May 2011 SH 080980ENG A First edition Addition Appendix 13 Appendix 14 Mar 2012 SH 080980ENG B PPA alla acai Section 2 5 Section 7 1 1 Section 7 1 3 Section 7 2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELATED MANUALS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL TERMS Section 2 5 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 3 3 Section 4 2 1 Section 4 2 2 Section 4 6 1 Section 4 6 2 Section 5 3 1 Section 6 1 Section 6 1 1 Section 6 1 2 Apr 2012 SH 080980ENG C Section 6 1 3 Section 8 1 Section 10 2 7 Section 12 1 Section 12 5 Section 12 6 1 Section 12 6 2 Chapter 14 Chapter 14 1 Section 16 5 Appendix 3 Appendix 9 Appendix 11 1 Appendix 12 1 Chapter 4 Appendix 12 Chapter 5 to Chapter 17 Chapter 4 to Chapter 16 Appendix 12 to Appendix14 Appendix 13 to Appendix 15 Correction Dec 2012 SH 080980ENG D HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL TERMS Section 2 5 Section 4 2 1 Section 13 2 2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE TERMS Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Section 2 5 Section 3 1 Section 3 2 Section 4 1 Section 4 2 Section 4 3 Section 4 3 1 Section 5 1 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 4 Section 5 2 5 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 Section 5
113. E Field Utility lt gt Page 143 Section 13 1 2 Set Mode to H W Test and click the Mode Hiv Test Start Test Start Test button lt Normal completion gt 3 The result is displayed on Test Result field If the test completes abnormally consult your local s AOW N Z7 S p peog y Jo s s uojepug sS BuniM 310499 SIS L S Y Test Result Hi Test was normaly completed o Mitsubishi service center or representative lt Abnormal completion gt Test Result Hi Test was abnormaly completed Point Operation during hardware test Do not access the buffer memory during the hardware test Doing so may cause the test to fail 53 4 5 4 Self loopback test Self loopback test checks the hardware of the CC Link IE Field Network board alone including the send receive circuit of the transmission system and cables The following shows a procedure for performing a test 1 Channel No 181 Mode Self Loopback Test Start Test lt Normal completion gt 4 Self Loopback Test was normaly completed lt Abnormal completion gt Self Loopback Test was abnormaly completed Point When conducting the self loopback test use a normal Ethernet cable lt gt Page 33 Section 2 4 1 04 Connect Ethernet cables to the RJ45 connector PORT1 and RJ45 connector PORT2 of the CC Link IE Field Network board Select a board to be tested on the Board
114. ENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the results when cyclic transmission is started by System link start SB0002 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station lt gt Page 203 Section 16 9 Data link start status SW0052 When System link start SBO002 is turned OFF the stored error definition x entire system l is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the results when cyclic transmission is stopped by System link stop SB0003 0 Normal 1 or higher Error definition in own station lt 3 Page 203 Section 16 9 Data link stop status SW0053 When System link stop SB0003 is turned OFF the stored error definition x entire system l is cleared Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the results when executing the temporary error invalid station setting 0 Normal swo e E r Aon Page 203 Section 16 9 x staton Setting result or higher Abnormal lt _ gt Page Section 16 9 O O When Temporary error invalid request SB0010 is turned OFF the stored 2 error definition is cleared z IA Stores the results when canceling the temporary error invalid station setting gt 0 Temporary error invalid 0 Normal D SW0055 station setting cancel 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 203 Section 16 9 S result a When Te
115. ER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 MODE LED is turned OFF or flashing MODE LED is an LED which does not exist on the board Check the status with the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Page 155 Section 13 2 2 7 When the MODE LED is turned OFF it is in the offline mode When the MODE LED is flashing it is in the test mode Check Corrective action Is the mode set to the online mode Change the mode to the online mode _ gt Page 111 Section 10 2 Is the hardware of the board operating normally Perform the board test L gt Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 poyjyew Buloy 2 91 snje s G37 BuryjoeyuD L49 197 2 D LINK LED is turned OFF or flashing D LINK LED is an LED which does not exist on the board Check the status with the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen L gt Page 155 Section 13 2 2 7 When the D LINK LED is turned OFF both cyclic transmission and transient transmission of the board are stopped When the D LINK LED is flashing the cyclic transmission of the board is stopped or communication route is consecutively built because the network communication route is unstable Check Is the master station connected to the network and operating normally Is the connected other station normal Are cables and wiring normal Is the loopback function set to be used on the master station Check for any of the following wiring conditions e Connecting both PORT1
116. ERATION 4 4 Setting Channel Numbers Channel number is set per board and used to identify the board 181 is set for the board channel number as a factory default and the range of 181 to 184 can be set Channel numbers being set are used to specify the target boards in setting parameters and performing the MELSEC data link library function When using two or more boards in a single personal computer set channel numbers not to overlap 1 Setting method Set the channel numbers on the Channel No Setting screen in CC IE Field Utility Page 125 Section 11 1 Point Channel numbers set on the Channel No Setting is saved to the board The channel numbers being set are retained when performing the following operations e Rebooting a personal computer Board installation position change e Board replacement to another personal computer SJOqUNN jeuUeYD ues py 51 4 5 Tests Before Wiring Standalone Tests of the Board This section explains the CC Link IE Field Network board tests before network wiring Point Ethernet cable Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the CC Link IE Field Network board in testing a board alone Doing so may cause the test to fail 4 5 1 Bus I F test Bus I F test checks the hardware of the Bus I F function of the CC Link IE Field Network board The following shows a procedure for performing a test 1 Select a board to be tested on the Board ChannelNo fist Diagnostics screen
117. F is described on the following pages Point e Do not turn ON or OFF areas whose numbers are not on the link special relay SB list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 228 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station The own station s cyclic transmission is restarted OFF No start direction ON Start direction enabled during start up SBO000 Link start own station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SBO000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON The own station s cyclic transmission is stopped OFF No stop direction ON Stop direction enabled during start up SB0001 Link stop own station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SB0000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON O O Cyclic transmission of the entire system is restarted The station where cyclic transmission is restarted is specified by the Link stop start direction SWO0000 to SWO0008 OFF No start direction SB0002 System link start ON Start direction enabled during start up x Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SBO000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON Cyclic transmission of the entire system is stopped The station where cyclic
118. Field Network parameters O Required A Set as required No setting Necessity of setting Item Reference Master station Local stations Network Type Channel No Network No Network setting Page 111 Section 10 2 Total Stations Station No Mode Station No Sainte SO Parse Sf oo Network Configuration RWwRWrSetting o o ooo o ae eom a Sienenenan Sethe Network Operation Setting Page 113 Section 10 2 2 Page 117 Section 10 2 3 Event Setting Page 118 Section 10 2 4 Driver Setting Page 120 Section 10 2 5 Target Setting Page 121 Section 10 2 6 Routing Parameters Page 122 Section 10 2 7 Point When parameters are not set CC Link IE Field Network board operates as a local station station number 1 of network number 1 in the offline mode In this case only transient transmission is performed Cyclic transmission is not performed 110 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 Setting Network Parameter Set the network number station number and other parameters for the CC Link IE Field Network board Display contents W View gt Network Parameter u Network Parameter CC JE Field Number of Boards Setting Board 3 Board 1 Board 2 Network Type CC IE Field Master Station w CC IE Field Local Station w None Noe CO O Channel No Network No Total Stations Station No Mode Network Configuration Setting Network Operation Setting Network Operation Setti
119. IAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 4 Cable test Test the status of the cable connections between the testing station and the devices connected to the ports of the testing station Screen display XW Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Cable Test button Cable Test Cable Test Contents Testing Station Setting Network No 1 Station No 2 4 Execute Test Testing cable status between testing station and equipment connected to testing station port Cable Test Result PORTI PORT2 Test Result Test Result Normal Cable disconnected unconnected Error Factor Error Factor Cable between this PORT and connected equipment is disconnected or cable is not connected to PORT Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Please check if cable is connected to PORT Please check if cable to connected equipment is not disconnected Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen 159 SIQED VCEL YIOMIJON PIa 31 4UIT OD Buisoubeiq ZEL Cable Test Contents Testing Station Setting Set the network number and station number of the station which executes the cable test 2 Click the Execute Test button The cable test is executed on the testing station Display contents Cable Test Result Display the cable test result error factor and troubleshooting of each port 159 13 2 5 Link start stop Start stop the data link of a specified station Use th
120. If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e Correct the read write address at the request source and retry the operation e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the operation e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the system configuration to reduce the number of relay stations to seven or less e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the network number at the request source and retry the operation e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action CHAPTER 16 TR
121. L JOJOWCIC d YIOM N PuIy sS COL 10 2 5 Driver setting Set the driver WDT monitoring time transient timeout monitoring time link refresh cycle and RECV function reception buffer Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen c gt Driver Setting RECY Function Receive Buffer amp Wo Setting Driver WOT Monitoring Time amp Setting 200 x10ms Transient Timeout Monitoring Time 15 F Link Refresh Cycle End Cancel ms Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Select Use driver WDT function to enable the function Driver WDT Monitoring Time Set the driver WDT monitoring time Setting range 1 to 32767 Set the transient timeout monitoring time Transient Timeout MonitoringTime Setting range 1 to 360 Set the link refresh cycle Link Refresh Cycle Setting range 1 to 1000 RECV Function Reception Buffer Set the RECV function reception buffer 1 Set No Setting when RECV Function is selected for the device code in the event setting 2 Clickthe En _ button 120 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 6 Target setting Set logical station numbers to access to multiple CPU system or redundant CPU system using the MELSEC data link library function Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen c gt Target Setting Network Par
122. N status of the own station s CPU module CPU RUN status own SB004C OFF Normal station ON Reset status driver stop by H W error Stores the status of the received parameter own parameter status during Received parameter master station SB004D error OFF Parameter normal ON Parameter error Turns ON when a cyclic transmission start request by Link start own station SB0000 is accepted Link start request OFF Not accepted SB0000 is OFF SB0050 accept status ON Start accepted SB0000 is ON O own station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the Link start request accept status own station SBO050 turns ON and cyclic transmission start is completed OFF Start not completed SB0000 is OFF Link start completion SB0051 ON Start completed SB0000 is ON status own station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when a cyclic transmission stop request by Link stop own station SB0001 is accepted Link stop request OFF Not accepted SB0001 is OFF SB0052 accept status ON Stop accepted SB0001 is ON own station sI7 GS ejay jeloeds yu xIpueddy Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Turns ON when the Link stop request accept status own station SB0052 turns ON and cyclic transmission stop is completed OFF Stop
123. Network board Page 53 Section 4 5 2 Cc Hardware test Check the hardware in the CC Link IE Field Network board Page 53 Section 4 5 3 3 49 Check the send receive circuit of the transmission system of the CC Link a Self loopback test Page 54 Section 4 5 4 IE Field Network board For module test other than boards refer to the manuals of each module 2 Network tests Perform tests on the Board Diagnostics screen L gt Page 143 Section 13 1 or the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen L gt Page 145 Section 13 2 to check for errors in the connection status or settings of the network Item Description Reference Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of each Loop test Page 59 Section 4 7 1 station Cable test Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable Page 61 Section 4 7 2 Check whether the communication path for transient transmission from i Page 62 Section 4 7 3 the own station to the target station is correct Communication test 195 16 7 11 Checking LED status The LED status can also be checked by the LED display on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Page 155 Section 13 2 2 7 other than checking the board visually Point When using the software package version 1 04E or later the LED status of MODE L ERR cannot be confirmed on the CC IE Field diagnostics screen Confirm the LED status with the value stored in the following link special relays SB and link
124. OUBLESHOOTING D209H Target station No error in D20AH transient data D20BH BpSciled Master Stalon No e Correct the target station number at the request source and retry the operation error in transient data Current master station No error D20CH in transient data e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e When the own station or target station detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Transient data transmission D20DH e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly Header information error in D20EH e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation transient data D20FH Target station No error in e Check if the command can be requested to all or a group of stations at the request transient data source and retry the operation Target station No error in D210H e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation transient data Own station No undefined completion wait timeout D211H e Set the station number in the parameter setting and retry the operation dedicated instruction e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source
125. Page 191 Section 16 7 5 2 After restarting the personal computer check if there is any error e Checking on Event Viewer screen Page 193 Section 16 7 7 3 Install the board and restart the personal computer e Checking the board installation status Page 190 Section 16 7 2 e Checking on Device Manager screen K Page 192 Section 16 7 6 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to L Page 202 Section 16 8 For the troubleshooting for the specific symptoms refer to 1 in this section UMOP SINUS JO WEIS JOU SBOP JO INdWOD jeuosI d EOL Ayan pue sayndwoy jeuosjeg Jo Bunjooyussjqnos 94 179 16 3 2 Utility does not startup When the utility does not startup check the following items Item Corrective action e Take corrective action following the message Is an error message displayed When the measurement displayed on the screen is not effective 5 Page 181 Section 16 3 4 Is the icon of the utility displayed in the menu of atid e The installation is not completed normally Install the software package the operating system p g Sy lt Page 172 Section 16 2 1 Does the utility start by clicking the icon If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to K Page 202 Section 16 8 16 3 3 The screen or operation is abnormal When the screen is not displayed normally or the software cannot be operated normally check the following items Item Corr
126. RX RY RWw RWr etc inside a module on CC Link IE Field Network Bit data that is input from the slave station to the master station with some exceptions for local stations Bit data that is output from the master station to the slave station with some exceptions for local stations 16 bit data word data that is input from the slave station to the master station with some exceptions for local stations 16 bit data word data that is output from the master station to the slave station with some exceptions for local stations Bit data that indicates the module or board operating status and data link status of CC Link IE Field Network 16 bit data word data that indicates the module or board operating status and data link status of CC Link IE Field Network Time required for the data sent by each station to rotate around the network The link scan time varies depending on the amount of data or transient transmission requests Data transfer between link devices of CC Link IE Field Network board and the driver Passing of a token to send data on the network A memory which is used to store data for communication between the CC Link IE Field Network board and the master local module Abbreviation for Reliability Availability and Serviceability A generic term used to describe the easy use of automated equipment Generic term for functions in MELSEC data link library Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the operation of network b
127. Result Connected StationfOwn Target Station Communication Information Outward Network No 1 gt Network No Communication Count 1 Times Station No 0 Station No 1 Communication Time 0 ms r e eee ee es ee cr Presence or absence of errors on the communication test Inward Network No Own Station Target Station Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Communication Test Contents Set the contents of the test to be executed Connected Station Own Display the network number and station number of the connected station Target Station Set the network number and station number Communication Data Set the data length 1 to 900 bytes the number of communications 1 to 100 times and Setting monitoring time 1 to 100 seconds to execute the test 2 Click the Execute Test button The communication test is executed according to the set contents Display contents Display the result of inter network communication test Also in Presence or absence of errors on the communication test displays whether the communication test has been executed normally Communication Test Result y Networks and stations routed from the own station connected station to the target station are displayed in the lt lt Outward gt gt tab and those routed from the target station to the own station connected station are displayed in the lt lt Inward gt gt tab 158 CHAPTER 13 D
128. WDT error has occurred is recognized as an error station on the network When using driver WDT function set the monitoring timer considering the margin of the personal computer load e For the troubleshooting refer to the following chapter Is Page 169 CHAPTER 16 8 UOHOUNS LAM 498A 6S CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 88 This chapter explains the software package installation and uninstallation 6 1 The following are the precautions when installing and uninstalling the software package Installation and Uninstallation Precautions Log on as a user having administrator authority Make sure to close other applications running on Windows including resident software such as antivirus software before installation and uninstallation The installer may not work normally because the update program of operating system or other companies software such as Windows Update and Java update may start automatically Please install the driver after changing the setting of the update program not to start automatically Check if the display settings on the Device Manager or other relevant functions are correct then install an appropriate display driver or update the Windows operating system The language switching function of the operation system set by Regional and Language Options on the Control Panel screen is not supported The installation or uninstallation may not work normally if the
129. When installing the board on the personal computer after the installation of the software package the driver is installed automatically 1 For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 R2 the driver is required to be specified on the Found New Hardware Wizard screen K gt Page 177 Section 16 2 4 When the driver installation is completed normally the following driver is displayed on the Device Manager screen of Windows Device name Driver name MELSEC CC Link IE Field Device MELSEC CC Link IE Field Controller d Service application To prevent a personal computer entering the power save mode hibernate sleep MELSECPowerManager is installed automatically under the specific operating system For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section KL Page 275 Appendix 13 3 When installation is aborted or failed When the installation is aborted or failed take corrective actions following the troubleshooting gt Page 172 Section 16 2 1 90 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6 3 Uninstallation This section explains a procedure for uninstalling the software package 1 Uninstallation procedure 1 Uninstall the software package from the control panel screen of Windows Point ifa screen confirming the deletion of common files appears at uninstallation Select No to All If deleting common files other applications may not operate normally ifa screen confirming t
130. Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Microsoft Resolution Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Vista Windows Server Windows Server Windows Server Windows Server Home Basic Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Home Premium Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Business Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Ultimate Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Enterprise Operating System Service Pack 2 or later 2008 Standard Operating System Service Pack 2 or later 2008 Enterprise Operating System Service Pack 2 or later 2008 Standard x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Operating System Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Operating System Windows 7 Home Premium 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windo
131. a Network 4 To the next page APPENDIX From the previous page 4 4 Check if MELSECPowerManager is registered File Action View Help e9 MS Gis a ml gt a n p amp Services Local Startup Type ete P Disabled Stop the service A 7 Pause the service _ m n Automa m Restart the service SE MTE TOSOTEN EN WCTOSONE Disabled Local System Microsoft NET Framew Microsoft Disabled Local System Microsoft NET Framew Microsoft Automatic D Local System Microsoft NET Framew Microsoft Automatic D Local System Microsoft Software Sha Manages so Manual Local System amp Multimedia Class Sched Enables rela Automatic Local System G amp Net Msmq Listener Ada Receives act Disabled Network Servic amp Net Pipe Listener Adapter Receives act Disabled Local Service ce Net Tcp Listener Adapter Receives act Disabled Local Service Gi Net Tcp Port Sharing Se Provides abi Disabled Local Service Ke Netlogon Maintains a Manual Local System Microsoft iSCSI Initiator Manages In Manual Local System amp Network Access Protecti The Networ Manual Network Servic amp Network Connections Manages o Manual Local System amp Network List Service Identifies th Manual Local Service amp Network Location Awar Collects an Automatic Network Servic amp Network Store Interface This service Automatic Local Service Oi Office S
132. a different network were received Correct the network number or target station number at the request source and retry the Network No error in transient D21DH data operation e The communication test cannot be executed with the relay station s specified Correct Communication Destination Setting and then execute the D21EH Target station No error in communication test again transient data e Transient data of the application type that is not executable for the own station were received Correct the application type or target station number at the request source and retry the operation e The SEND instruction is not applicable to head modules e Modify the program so that the SEND instruction will not be used for head modules Target station type error D21FH J yp dedicated instruction 205 Error code D220H D222H D223H D22EH D22FH D230H D231H D232H D234H D235H D240H to D243H D244H D245H D246H 206 No master station Transient data request error Transient error Station No setting not available for the target station No baton pass for the target station Incorrect station No specified Station No already set for the target station Station No setting target not exist No baton pass Transient error Target network module failure dedicated instruction Incorrect transient data Target station No error dedicated instruction Incorrect transi
133. a module identify the cause of the error with System Monitor of GX Works2 e Check the detailed information and identify the cause of the error CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 13 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special registers SW Check Is SB0047 Baton pass status own station faulty ON Is SWOOAO to SWO0A7 Baton pass status each station faulty ON Is SB0049 Data link status own station faulty ON Is there a cyclic transmission error station in SWOOBO to SW00B7 Data link status each station Is SBO04A SB004B Own station s CPU status 1 Own station s CPU status 2 faulty ON Is there an error station in SW0100 to SW0107 SW0110 to SW0117 CPU Stop error Continuation error Check link special relays SB and link special registers with the Device Monitor Utility gt Page 131 Section 12 2 Corrective action e Perform the troubleshooting for when the transient transmission cannot be performed at own station Page 188 Section 16 6 2 e Perform the troubleshooting for when the transient transmission cannot be performed at station in which baton pass error is occurring Page 188 Section 16 6 2 e Perform the troubleshooting for when the cyclic transmission cannot be performed at own station Page 187 Section 16 6 1 e Perform the troubleshooting for when the cyclic transmission cannot be performed at station in which data
134. a type of devices whose values are to be changed e Enter a block number for ER Device Type e Enter a network number for LW and LSW e Enter a value of start I O number divided by 16 in decimal for SPG Set a start number of devices whose values are to be changed Device No HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal 2 Setavalue and points to be changed Item Description Set a value to be changed Setting Data 4 HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal 3 For the Continuous Changing in Data function set device points to be changed Item Description Set a number of devices whose values are to be changed Points HEX Hexadecimal DEC Decimal OCT Octal Setting range 1 to 64 points 4 Clickthe Execute button 138 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING When the DEC Decimal is selected only signed decimal format can be specified A data of a word device double word device can also be changed by double clicking the device column of the device information on the monitoring screen Aw 0001 0 Data Changing Vw 0002 0 Device Ww 0002 C HEX pDEc fo Click When the display format is set to decimal unsigned 16 bit or decimal unsigned 32 bit on the Date Changing screen displayed by double clicking the device column the value same as the display format can be set Device LTN 2 HEX C pec 00000000 12 6 2 Turning bit devices ON and OFF Change ONs and OFFs of bit devices Screen display
135. al shows ELSEC Datalink Library Programmer s Reference reference pages 16 Pages are organized as shown below to describe the utility functions 14 2 4 cable test Test the status of the cable connections between the testing station and the devices connected to the ports of the testing_station Screen display Screen display Describes the Screen display K Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics procedure c gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Cable Test button Follow c gt and select Cable Test menu to open the screen Network No 1 Station No 2 Vv Execute Test Testing cable status between testing station and equipment connected to testing station port Cable Test Result PORTI PORT2 Test Result Test Result Normal Cable disconnected unconnected Error Factor Error Factor Cable between this PORT and connected equipment is disconnected or cable is not connected to PORT Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Please check if cable is connected to PORT Please check if cable to connected equipment is not disconnected z Operating procedure Operating procedure x Describes the operating 1 Set the items onthe screen 3 Item Description pi procedure of a function Sabie Test Contenis Testing Station Setting Set the network number and station number of the station which executes the cable test 2 Click the Execute Test button The cable test is executed on the testing station
136. all driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device software is safe to install Unable to install SW1DNC CCIEF B because NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 is unchecked Please install SW1DNC CCIEF B again after checking the box on NET Framework 3 5 includes NET 2 0 and 3 0 Control Panel gt Programs gt Programs and Features gt Turn Windows features on or off Windows downloads required files connecting to Windows Update screens Software Installation A The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with this version of Windows Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP instalation Security Alert Driver Installation bx The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenticode TM technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The installed INF file does not contain digital signature information Do you still want to install this driver
137. ameter CC JE Field Target Setting Board No 1 Logical Station No Network No Station No Multiple PLC Redundant PLC aa S ami mm FE 3 5 Een 8 Eas 10 em 12 13 14 15 16 Era V End Cancel Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Set the logical station number Logical Station No Setting range 0 to 239 Set the network number of the access target Bunjes zae l 9 Z OL JOJOWECIC YIOMIJON Buias COL Network No Setting range 1 to 239 Set the station number of the access target Station No Setting range 0 to 120 Multiple PLC Set the access target CPU CPU number in the multiple CPU system Redundant PLC Set the access target CPU system specification for the redundant system 2 Click the End button Screen button Clear button Clears all settings Check button Checks whether the settings are correct 121 10 2 7 Routing parameters Set communication paths for transient transmission between a station in the own network and stations in other networks Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen o gt Routing Parameters button Network Parameter CC JE Field Routing Information Setting Target Network Relay Network Relay Condition Setting of Relay Target Network No No Station No In Network System including the board of each Channel No
138. ard reset at driver startup At common parameter transmission by master station At driver operation log update CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 8 Checking channel numbers Check if the channel numbers are properly assigned to the boards on the Channel No Setting screen gt Page 125 Section 11 1 Check Corrective action e Check the Device Manager screen Page 192 Section 16 7 6 e Check the Event Viewer screen Page 193 Section 16 7 7 Are all installed boards displayed Are channel numbers duplicated e Set channel numbers not to duplicate 16 7 9 Checking operations with board diagnostics Check the contents displayed in the board list on the Board Diagnostics screen lt _ gt Page 143 Section 13 1 Check Corrective action Are all installed boards displayed e Check the channel numbers Page 195 Section 16 7 8 e Check the error code and perform the corrective action described in the Is a board error occurring i error code list lt _ gt Page 203 Section 16 9 16 7 10 Checking operations with tests 1 Board test D D Check for hardware errors by performing board tests on the Board Diagnostics screen _ gt Page 143 Section J a O a gt 13 1 3 9 O oS Check the hardware related to the bus I F function of the CC Link IE Field 5S Bus I F test Page 52 Section 4 5 1 D gt Network board 28 49 Memory test Check the memory of the CC Link IE Field
139. are connected properly D212H Transient transmission failed e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 of the request source and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation D213H e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation D214H e Correct the data length at the request source and retry the operation D215H e Change the mode to Online and retry the operation D216H to D217H e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e At the request source correct the number of the data to be read from or written to D218H Transient data request error the device and retry the operation D219H Transient data request error e Correct the attribute code at the request source and retry the operation D21AH Transient data request error e Correct the access code at the request source and retry the operation e Abnormal transient data were issued from the CPU module SI BPOD 10113 691 e Replace the CPU module and retry the operation D21BH to D21CH Transient data request error i aa e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e A cable test cannot be applied to a network of a different network number Correct the data in Testing Station Setting and retry the cable test e Transient data that is not applicable to
140. are stored in the link devices RY RWw of the master station board by link refresh The status data of the link devices RY and RWw of the master station are stored in the link devices RY RWw of each slave station by link scan The status data of the link devices RY RWw of the slave station are output to the external device e Input from the slave station The status data of the external device are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the slave station The status data of the link devices RX RWr of the slave station are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station by link scan The status data of the link devices RX RWr of the master station board are stored in the driver by link refresh The status data of the driver are stored in the user program by MD function CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 2 Master and local stations Data can be written into the send range of each station s link device RY RWw and can be sent to any station on the same network The status data of the link devices RY RWw of the master station are stored in the link devices RX RWr of each local station The status data of the link devices RY RWw of local stations are stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station and the link devices RY RWw of other local stations e u_ ewes eF TF Q 1 Personal computer Station number 0 5 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Personal computers Station Station I
141. ash ROM has exceeded its limit Replace a Flash ROM failure master local module and board The flash ROM may be failed Perform hardware and self loopback tests gt Page 53 Section 4 5 3 Page 54 Section 4 5 4 Flash ROM failure Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error _ Page 214 1 in this section e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly Receive queue full on e Using the COM instruction increase the processing frequency of transient transmission Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section Parameter error e Write the network parameters again to the programmable controller e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or Parameter check result error representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section e Check the error on the PLC Diagnostics screen in GX Works2 and take action CPU module stop error If the error is occurring on the board check it in the event viewer gt Page 193 Section 16 7 7 Board driver stop error Programmable controller power e The power is OFF Turn it ON failure Error code D81DH to D825H D826H D827H D902H
142. assured in 32 bit units or for each station 1 32 bit data assurance The RWw and RWr data can be assured in 32 bit units a Setting method Disable Block Data Assurance per Station on the Supplementary Setting screen in Network Configuration Setting Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 To enable 32 bit data assurance disable Block Data Assurance per Station CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting Constant Scan ms Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Clear the check box b Access to cyclic data When accessing link refresh target devices the integrity of the 32 bit data can be assured by accessing RWw and RWr with the following conditions satisfied e Start device number of RWw RWr is a multiple of 2 e The number of points assigned to RWw RWr is a multiple of 2 Point For data assurance of more than 32 bits use the block data assurance per station or interlock programs 70 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 2 Block data assurance per station Integrity of the cyclic data is assured for each station by handshaking between the driver and the CC Link IE Field Network board for a link refresh a Setting method Enable Block Data Assurance per Station on the Supplementary Setting in Network Configuration Setting C gt Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 Once th
143. aste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions wN i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance syste
144. ation SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored sI7 GS ejay jeloeds yu xIpusddy Stores the baton pass status for master station OFF Normal Baton pass status ON Error O O SBOO0A1 master station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF 235 Number SBOOBO SB00B1 SBO00CO SBOODO SBOOEO 236 Data link status each station Data link status master station Reserved station specification Error invalid station setting Temporary error invalid station status Availability Description Master Local station station Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station OFF Cyclic transmission for all stations in progress ON Cyclic transmission not executed for some stations If cyclic transmission are not executed for some stations the status of each station can be checked by Data link status each station SWOOBO to SWO00B7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh Data link status each station SWOOBO to SW00B7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the cyclic transmission status for the master station OFF Normal ON Error Conditions e This is e
145. ation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting for MELSEC Q series CC Link IE Field Network master local modules Overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings functions programming and troubleshooting for MELSEC L series CC Link IE Field Network master local modules Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting for head module Specifications procedures before operation system configuration installation wiring settings and troubleshooting for Ethernet adapter module Programming function specifications and sample programming for MELSEC data link library MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual is stored on the CD ROM of the software package in a PDF file format Manuals in printed form are sold separately for a single purchase Order a manual by quoting the manual number model code listed in the above table CONTENTS SAFRE POPRECAUTIONS PANA a cee Mec rae rece ere wae te Ene een cia Ara ee en een ater 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT EA e a e a erm S A eh 0 Lcd pee say Beeler 6 PRECAUTIONS FORUSE S Sarain aA E IT E T EAE AR ONE E A A Na 7 INTRODUCTION CT IE EE Pe LOE Dah AO pale AU iach ete ee Reo alee Le e crane Gu aNd swan 8 Fee Eee EAA eS ID INIA See ge A E Fes Pe AO store aT Sa ater A ee
146. ation is unstable 0 ete nee eens 186 16 6 Troubleshooting for Device AcceSS ununa nananana 187 16 6 1 Cyclic transmission cannot be performed 0 0 00 187 16 6 2 Transient transmission cannot be performed sasaaa 000 cece eee ae 188 16 7 Checking method 0 0 0 eee eens 189 16 7 1 Checking installation environment 0 0 0 000 c cece eee eee ees 190 16 7 2 Check the board installation 0 0 0 6 eee nen es 190 16 7 3 Checking cables and wiring css c0ci osc6ct ensnchetuaetavtascienseduataesaaeea 190 16 7 4 Checking operation environment 000 ananena rererere eee 191 16 7 5 Checking personal computer and operating system 00000 cee eee eee 191 13 14 16 7 6 Checking on Device Manager screen 0 00 cece eens 192 16 7 7 Checking operations with event viewer 0000s cece eee eee ee 193 16 7 8 Checking channel numbers 0 00000 cee tte te tee eee nes 195 16 7 9 Checking operations with board diagnostics 0 0 00 cece ee eee eee 195 16 7 10 Checking operations with tests 2 0 0 0 eens 195 16 7 11 Checking LED status scdeasscdh codec dvnsiadedvadonstuatdveseetaun oebeesaes ads 196 16 7 12 Checking network status with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 200 16 7 13 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special registers SW a aa eo ee eRe oe ole ee ol ee Bae ee ea ee 201 16 7 14 Checking co
147. ation number Buffer memory addresses 19968 4E00H Station No 1 Offset 19969 4E01H Station No 1 Size in units of words 19970 4E02H Station No 2 Offset 19971 4E03H Station No 2 Size in units of words 20206 4EEEn Station No 120 Offset 20207 4EEFn Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station number can be calculated using the formula below e Offset buffer memory address 19968 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 19969 station number 1 x 2 4 RWr offset size information Address 20224 to 20225 4F00H to 4FEFH The areas to store the RWr start number and number of points for each station number Buffer memory addresses po224 ar 00H 20225 4701 20226 4F02H 20227 4F 03 20462 4FEEn Station No 120 Offset 20463 4FEFH Station No 120 Size in units of words The offset and size buffer memory address for each station number can be calculated using the formula below e Offset buffer memory address 20224 station number 1 x 2 e Size buffer memory address 20225 station number 1 x 2 UOI JEWNOJUI OZIS OSHO ZZ xipueddy sessolppy Aiowsyy yng jo sjielagq Zz xipueddy 225 Appendix 2 3 Own station information The areas to store the own station s information on the network 1 Own station network card information Address 20512 to 20515 5020H to 5023H Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name
148. ation type error CCPASET executing station Number of total slave stations setting error CCPASET Constant link scan time setting error CCPASET Station No range error CCPASET Duplicate station No CCPASET Number of total slave stations error CCPASET Station type error CCPASET Device range assignment error CCPASET Target station type error Target station No error Network No error CCPASET executing station Station No error CCPASET executing station Mode error CCPASET executing station Transient data request error Transient reception failed Receive queue full CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Corrective action e Parameter setting using the CCPASET instruction is not available for local stations It must be executed to the master station e Correct the number of total slave stations in the control data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the constant link scan time in the control data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change the station number in the setting data to any of 1 to 120 and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or re
149. atus OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion 232 Number SB005E SB005F SB0060 SB0065 SB006A SB006B SB006C SB006D SB006E SBOO6F SB0072 Reserved station specification enable request accept status Reserved station specification enabled status Constant link scan status Loopback status PORT 1 linkup status own station PORT 2 linkup status own station PORT1 error frame reception status own station PORT2 error frame reception status own station PORT1 error frame detection own station PORT2 error frame detection own station Scan mode setting information APPENDIX Availability Description Turns ON when the Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 is accepted OFF Not accepted ON Enable accepted Turns ON when the Reserved station specification enable request accept status SBOO5E is turned ON and the reserved station specification enable processing is completed OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion Stores the constant link scan status OFF Constant link scan is disabled ON Constant link scan is enabled Conditions e This is enabled when the Data link status own station SB0049 is OFF Stores loopback execution status The loopback station numbers can be checked by Loopback station number 1 SW0070 and Loopback station number 2 SW0071 OFF Normal no loopback stations ON Error loo
150. b is used L gt Page 33 Section 2 4 2 Is the switching hub normal e Power off and then on the switching hub e Replace the switching hub 190 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 4 Checking operation environment Check if the supported operating system and functions are used Check Corrective action Is the operating system written in Operating e Use a personal computer on which the supported operating system is Environment K Page 34 Section 2 5 Used installed Is a programming language written in Operating Create a user program using a supported programming language Environment Page 34 Section 2 5 used e For precautions when using MELSEC data link library refer to the for a user program using MELSEC data link following manual library LAMELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Are the functions written in The functions cannot be used K gt Page 34 Section 2 5 e Change the settings for the unsupported functions in Operating Environment set Is the personal computer logging on as a user a e Log on as a user with administrator authority with administrator authority 16 7 5 Checking personal computer and operating system Check if the personal computer or operating system has any problem Check Corrective action Is the power supply ensured e Check the power outlet and power cable of the personal computer e Change the installation location of the board e Check the resource acquisition s
151. ber whose first five digits are 15102 or higher install SW1DNC CCIEF B version 1 04E or later When using SW1DNC CCIEF B version 1 03D or earlier one of the following error occurs in the SEND RECV function and the function cannot be used e SEND function Board driver I F error 103 00674 e RESV function Timeout error 2 0002H For an error occurred refer to the following manual LAMELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual O Applicable lt Not applicable Version of SW1DNC CCIEF B 1 03D or earlier 1 04E or later Serial number 14052 or lower 15102 or higher CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 1 Channel use for dedicated instruction A channel is an area of a CC Link IE Field Network board where data handled by a SEND RECV function is stored By using multiple channels it is possible to simultaneously access from the own station to other stations or concurrently read from and write to the same board a Number of channels The CC Link IE Field Network board has 2 channels that can be used for SEND RECV function By using 2 channels simultaneously the sending and receiving of two data can be executed at the same time b Precautions When executing the sending and receiving of multiple data simultaneously make sure that the channels for the instructions are not duplicated The sending and receiving for which the same channel is specified cannot be executed simultaneously To use the same channel for multi
152. bishi service center or representative e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section e Check the data at the station that initiated the online test and retry the test e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e After completion of the communication test retry it e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics take action and retry the operation e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics take action and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the routing parameters are correctly set e Correct the header information at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics take action and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take SI BPOD 10113 691 action e If the number of slave stations per network is more than 120 reduce it to 120 or less e Check Communication Destination Setting of the communication test and retry the operation e After completi
153. bles may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the board or cables or malfunctions due to poor contact When disconnecting the cable from the board do not pull the cable by the cable part Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the personal computer Such foreign matter may cause a fire failure or malfunction Do not install the communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Securely plug the communication cable to the connector of the board Then check for any incomplete connection Poor contact may cause an erroneous input or output Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Failure to do so may cause a malfunction Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Turn off the power for the system in all phases before cleaning the board or retightening the board fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause a failure or malfunction of the board Turn off the power for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction Do not connect or disconnect any communication cable w
154. ccur when the system is overloaded temporarily due to the following factors e Windows start processing at the personal computer startup e Operation of a device driver such as a graphic board e Operation of other software applications If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 202 Section 16 8 1 6 4 3 Driver does not start When the driver does not start normally check the following items Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly e Check the board installation status Page 190 Section 16 7 2 Is the channel number set properly e Check the channel number Page 195 Section 16 7 8 Is the software package installed e Reinstall the software package K Page 172 Section 16 2 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K Page 202 Section 16 8 D D ROAR Ny 16 4 4 Bus error gS lt O 2 n Sa i O When the bus error occurred check the following items a oO Item Corrective action 9 F UJ Is the board installed properly Check the board installation status Page 190 Section 16 7 2 9 Does the board operate on other personal After formatting the HD install the operating system again computer Repair or replace the personal computer a o D If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 202 Section 16 8 183 16 5 Troubleshooting for Data Link The following shows the troubleshooting for erro
155. ce eee 264 Appendix 10 New and Improved Functions 0 000 eee eens 265 Appendix 10 1 Change of hardware function 2 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee ee eee 265 Appendix 10 2 Update of software package 2 000 cee eee ee eee eee 265 Appendix 11 Windows Warning Message 0 000 cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 265 Appendix 11 1 Overview of warning message 1 2 ee ee es 265 Appendix 11 2 Methods for preventing warning message 2 00 e eee eee eee 266 Appendix 12 Behavior When Personal Computer Enters Power Save Mode or Fast Startup 212 Appendix 12 1 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate noaoono dow elec wea Goa weal gow Ae wow ew ae we ee 212 Appendix 12 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep nononono ee ee ees 213 Appendix 12 3 Behavior when fast startup function is enabled a na aaaea aeaa aaa aaa 214 Appendix 13 MELSECPowerManager 0 00 ccc eee ee eee ee eee eens 215 Appendix 13 1 Installing MELSECPowerManager 00 0 e eee eee ee eee 275 Appendix 13 2 Uninstalling MELSECPowerManager a na eaea 2175 Appendix 13 3 Checking MELSECPowerManager 002 eee eee eee ee eee es 2 6 Appendix 14 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 00002 eee 278 Appendix 14 1 Measures to comply with the EMC Directive 2000 eee eee 278 Appendix 14 2 Measures to comply with the Low Volta
156. cess the network the event history log e er view reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations Enable Disable View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily Ignore Station Errors ignore station errors 149 uaesos sonsoubelp Bulkeydsiq ZZE WIOMION PIa J1 4UIT OD Bulsoubeig Zep 1 Select diagnostics target Screen display Select Diagnostics Destination Board Board ifNetwork No 1 Change Board Select Station Station No 3fError Display contents Display the selected diagnostics target board and the network number Board Display the station number of the station selected in the network configuration Select Station Set the station number to be selected Screen button e Change Board button Displays the Change Board screen lt gt Page 146 Section 13 2 1 Point Selecting a target from Network Status A diagnostics target can also be selected from the network configuration of Network Status 2 Monitor status Display current monitoring status Screen display Monitor Status IE Monikating Stark Monitor Stop Monitor Screen button e Start Monitor button Starts monitoring e Stop Monitor button Stops monitoring 150 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 3 Network status Screen display Network Status Total Slave Stations 5 Total Slave reai 5 Current Link lee Number of Station
157. ch function Display the current device status For changing the monitoring method refer to the following section Device information L Page 134 Section 12 3 For changing the current values refer to the following section L Page 138 Section 12 6 Display the currently set network status Network status For setting the network refer to the following section Page 136 Section 12 4 Display the type and display format of devices being displayed For changing a device type refer to the following section Display method L Page 137 Section 12 5 For changing a display format refer to the following section Page 141 Section 12 7 Point When own station is set as a monitoring target 0 is displayed for the network number and 255 is displayed for the station number as a network status 132 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 2 3 Help function 1 Displaying Help screen Display the Help screen of Device Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 Z gt Help gt Help 2 Checking product version Display information such as a software version of Device Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 Z gt Help Version Device Monitor Utility evice Monitor Utili 08 Device Monitor Utility 2010 08 09 Copyright C 2001 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved uolouny djaH ZZ Ay JOWUO 2912 JO suoneJsado ISeg pu
158. connected station displayed in the network configuration Page 147 Section 13 2 2 of the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Perform a troubleshooting on the disconnected station for when D LINK LED is OFF or flashing Page 198 Section 16 7 11 2 Total stations set for network parameter of the master station is different from the number of slave stations connected to the Correct Total stations to match with the number of slave stations network If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K gt Page 202 Section 16 8 184 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 5 2 User program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU The 64 bit version user program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU Q mode Use 32 bit version user program 16 5 3 Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program When the communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing a user program check the following items Item Corrective action Check the returned value of the communication function Ist he error code returned to the user program Page 203 Section 16 9 Check the network status with the utility Page 200 Section 16 7 12 Check if the same error occurs when adding the station in order next to Can the network error be monitored with utility the existing station for the system configuration which is configured only by a master station and own stati
159. crosoft Visual Studio 2013 Visual C Windows XP 64 bit version and Windows Vista 64 bit version are not supported For a combination of the operation system and the programming language refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base 64 bit version user programs cannot be created using MELSEC data link library Use Visual Studio 2010 or later 1 Instructions for personal computer a PCI standard When a personal computer which is not compliant with the PCI or PCI Express standard is used troubles caused by failures such as a contact failure or operation error may occur This board may not operate when a PCI Express slot for graphics is used For details of the number of boards that can be installed installation slots and occupied slots refer to gt Page 40 Section 3 2 2 Instructions for operating system a Supported version of SW1DNC CCIEF B Supported version Operating system Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Windows XP 32 bit version Windows Vista 32 bit version All versions Windows Server 2003 R2 32 bit version Windows Server 2003 R2 64 bit version Version 1 02C or later Windows Server 2008 32 bit version All versions Version 1 05F or later Windows Server 2008 64 bit version Windows Server 2008 R2 Version 1 02C or later Windows 7 64 bit version Windows Server 2012 Version 1 04E or later Windows 8 Windows Server 2012 R2 l l Version 1 06G or later Vers
160. ctly set and take corrective action e An invalid value is set for the control block of the dedicated instruction Correct the value and then retry the operation Dedicated instruction error o e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem l e Set the station number in Network Parameter and retry the operation Own station No undefined i o i e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or dedicated instruction ee representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e The flash ROM may be faulty Flash ROM failure Refer to corrective action for hardware error L gt Page 214 1 in this section e Correct the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station or target station has detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Arrival confirmation error a e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation dedicated instruction e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly 207 D252H D253H D254H D255H D256H D257H D258H D259H D25AH D25BH D25
161. d Network station CPU 262 APPENDIX Appendix 8 Combinations with Existing Software There is no restriction when using CC Link IE Field Network board with other MELSEC interface boards or MELSOFT products on the same personal computer For the restrictions of the applicable operating environment or applicable access target refer to the manual of each product SJEMIULOS Bulsixy UM SUOIIEUIQWOD g Xipu ddy 263 Appendix 9 Checking Serial Number and Function Version This section explains a method for checking a serial number and a function version of CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Checking on the rating plate A serial number and a function version of CC Link IE Field Network board can be checked on the rating plate Serial no first 5 digits Function version 2 Checking on the CC Link Field utility A serial number and a function version can be displayed on the Board Diagnostics screen in the CC IE Field Utility Screen display KO Diagnostics gt Board Diagnostics Board Information Channel Mo 181 Model Name QS1BD 3715F11 T2 Product 2122000000000048 Serial no first 5 digits Function version Point The serial number displayed on the Board Diagnostics screen in the CC IE Field Utility may differ from that on the rating plate of the CC Link IE Field Network board The serial number on the rating plate of the CC Link IE Field Network board indicates the managem
162. d S eset Station Legend Data link unperfo Disconnected station Network configuration j status monitor Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q80BD J71 L Operation Test 4 Communication Test Check the transient communication route from the connected station to the destination station Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and the destination station Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Operation Test Mode Online MAC Address 08 00 70 45 7F D2 Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set Information Confirmation Set Network Event History Access the network the event history log J Pararem mete here ar B Reserv ed Station View reserved station numbers and temporarily enable Function Enable reserved stations Enable Disable View station numbers set to ignore errors and temporarily Ignore Station Errors e station errors Display contents O Diagnosed A Diagnosed with restrictions x Not diagnosed Diagnostics Item Restrictions Reference Monitor Status Page 150 2 in this section Select Diagnostics Destination pe Pe Page 150 1 in this section Display of network configuration and errarstatus Page 151 3 in this section Page 151 4 in this section Page 152 5 in this section usas0s sonsoubelp Bulkejdsi
163. d high performance cable standard Category 5e or higher double shielded cable e Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated l cable STP straight cable lt gt Page 33 Section 2 4 1 Maximum l 100m maxi E A EEE a PE Compliant with ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e L gt Page 57 Section 4 6 2 Line topology 12000m when connected to 1 master Transmission station to S oo i connected stations and transmission speed specifications station distance station and 120 slave stations Total distance 1200m at transmission speed of 156kbps Star topology Depends on the system configuration Ring topology 12100m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations Network E EEA Line topology star topology Coexistence of line topology Pa topology and star topology is possible ring topology YIOMION PI 4 Fl YUIT OO pue yu1 00 Jo uosWedwoy xipueddy Number of iat ctaitiail 1 station up to 64 remote stations can be 1 station up to 120 slave stations can be connected aster station connected connected to master station to master station stations in one Local station 26 stations 120 stations network Station type Master station local station Communication method Broadcast polling Token passing method Number of occupied I O points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points 1 These are values in remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode 261 b Hardware specifications Specificat
164. data to the same channel of the target station before reading the specified channel data Own station Target station User application Target station CPU module main Channel 1 A Channel 1 mdOpen 181 1 amp path D mdSendEx path 1 1 Channel 2 mdSendEx path 1 1 Channel 2 Channel 2 mdClose path RECV When the multiple network modules are mounted on the target station Specify the station number and network number of the network module which is received the request from the own station The following example specifies the station number 1 of the network number 1 The station number 5 of the network number 2 cannot be specified Own station Target station Station Station Station No 0 No 1 No 5 Network No 1 Station Station No 3 No 2 Station No 1 Specify station No 1 as the target station Station No 5 cannot be specified 78 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS a Execution type Two execution types with arrival confirmation and without arrival confirmation are available for the SEND function When sending data with without arrival confirmation execution type All stations and Group numbers can be specified as target stations besides the station number Without arrival confirmation When the target station is on the same network The process is completed when data is sent from the own station m Target station Completed e Without arrival conf
165. der can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the _ Bowe button Workspace Project List Select a workspace and a project Workspace Name Enter the name of the workspace to which the unpacked project is saved Project Name Enter the name of the project to which the unpacked project is saved 2 Click the __4 2k button The compressed project file is unpacked and saved in the specified folder sjosfo1dg Buiyoedu pue uoissaidwoy ym sjoaloig BulAes y 6 Screen button Unpack and pen button Unpacks the compressed project file and opens the project 107 9 5 Deleting Projects This section explains a method for deleting a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer Operating procedure 1 X Project gt Delete The Delete Project screen is displayed 2 Select the project to be deleted 3 Clickthe Delete button The selected project is deleted Delete Project Save Folder Path L Documents and Settings XP My DocumentsiWworkspace2 Browse Workspace Project List It returns to the workspace list Project cence 9 6 Closing Projects This section explains a method for closing an open project Operating procedure 1 Project gt Close 108 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9 7 Verifying Project Data This section explains a method for verifying data of an open project and data of another project Use this
166. dicated instruction Reconnection Disconnection 18 Description Generic term for Q8OBD J71GF11 T2 and Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network interface board Generic term for Q80BD J71GP21 SX Q80BD J71GP21S SX Q81BD J71GP21 SX and Q81BD J71GP21S SX CC Link IE Controller Network interface board Generic term for Q80BD J61BT11N and Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link system master local interface board Generic term for Q80BD J71LP21 25 Q81BD J71LP21 25 Q80BD J71LP21S 25 Q80BD J71LP21G Q80BD J71LP21GE and Q80BD J71BR11 MELSECNETH H interface board Product name of the software package for CC Link IE Field Network board Name for the utility included in the SW1DNC CCIEF B CC Link IE Field Network software package General product name for SW8D5C GPPW E SW8D5C GPPW EA SW8D5C GPPW EV SW8D5C GPPW EVA General product name for SWnDNC GXW2 E SWnDNC GXW2 EA n denotes the version number Generic term for the MELSEC Q L series CPU module Generic term for the QU71GF11 T2 and LJ71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network master local module Abbreviation for the LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network head module Abbreviation for the NZ2GF ETB CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module Generic term for the following modules e CC Link IE Field Network module e CC Link IE Controller Network module e MELSECNET H module e MELSECNET 10 module A MELSEC L series module that has functions other than input or output such as A D converter module and D A convert
167. disconnected station that has been set in the network configuration settings but has not yet performed data link However even if a disconnected station had performed data link it is displayed in this area in the following cases e A station that was reconnected to a network after cable disconnection insertion or power off and power on of the system and remains disconnected e Data link unexecuted stationsA disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map display area by clicking the Hide Disconnected Station button Monitor Status v d BERR renin Stop Monitor Data link unperfo Disconnected station status monitor The icon indicates a station that has not yet performed data link Icons other than indicate stations that had performed data link before disconnection 7 Selected station communication status monitor Display status of the selected station Screen display Click the button to display the Error details screen Error details Selected station No 1 Det Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q81BD 371GF1i1 1 Mode Online 2 3 MAC Address EL IP Address 192 168 1 1 5 u s sonsoubelp HurAejds q ZZE JOM N PIP 4 J1 4UIT OD Buisoubeig ZE Display contents Display the station number and operating status Staton Mo 1 Mo Error Normal 1 Operating status Error Data link is continued yellow Error Data link is stopp
168. ds for writing project parameter settings to the board and reading current board parameter settings to the project Operating procedure 1 XX Online gt Read from Board Write to Board Channel numbers Parameter settings to be written to the board are reflected to the board of the corresponding channel number eee board channel numbers on the Channel No Setting screen L gt Page 125 Section 11 1 Board 4 Type CC IE Field Master Station w CC IE Field Local Station v None o None v PRE E hdhhh te Network o o e e Tastations Oooo a e E SSS EES SSS station o Y y E mde online Normal Mode v fonine A Network Configuration Setting Network Configuration Setting LS a Co p Parameter setting of Parameter setting of eea Co f channel number 181 AA channel number 182 ft Channel number 181 Channel number 182 Creating a new project with data read from the board A new project is created with the data read from the board when data are read from the board before creating a new project For reading data from board lt Page 102 Section 9 1 126 CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 11 3 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project This section explains a method for verifying parameters set to the board and parameters of open project Use this function to check if the parameters of the projects are the same or to check the changed parameter locations To verify two proj
169. dsecniy Administ Toos 7 serr aarne e Organize v E Open Burn 4 A Favori Name Date modified Type pe soe Pa REE REMARKS a Recent Places Data Sources ODBC 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut g ore qee as E When user account control is enabled the following E Documents b Loc rity Polic 2010 03 1 shortcut a Music TESA EA z y m 2 screen appears Click the or System Configuration 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut Task Scheduler 2009 07 14 13 42 Shortcut P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut Windows Memory Diagnostic 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut Windows PowerShell Modules 2009 07 14 13 52 Shortcut If you started this action continue Program name Microsoft Management Console pa Microsoft Management Console Verified publisher Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows show details Local Security Policy Date modified 2010 03 17 5 44 Date created 2010 03 17 5 44 Shortcut Size 1 21 KB Change when these notifications appear 5 Select Local Policies Eile Action View Help e gt GI X31 B Security Settings Name Description gt G Account E Account Policies Password and account lockout policies gt 1G Local Policies gt B Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec Network List Manager Policies gt Public Key Policies z gt 5 Software Restriction Policies E Public Key Policies b Application Control Policies Software Restr
170. dustry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubis
171. e Check whether the system is performing as set on the parameters and programs by checking the performance of link device communication or transient transmission reception Checking communication status with monitoring access target device Page 201 Section 16 7 14 5 Check the user program Check the operating environment Page 191 Section 16 7 4 Check the arguments of the communication function LA MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual Check the returned values of the communication function Page 203 Section 16 9 2 When error cannot be solved If the troubleshooting above does not help refer to Page 202 Section 16 8 169 16 1 Error Examples The following tables show examples of the major error under the specific conditions When the corresponding error occurred refer to the troubleshooting of each error 1 Installation of the software package Installation of the software e Page 177 Section 16 2 4 package has failed A mark is displayed next to the icon of the drive on the Device e Page 192 Section 16 7 6 Manager screen Uninstallation of the software The software package is not uninstalled despite the uninstallation Paa Page 172 Section 16 2 2 package has failed completed message has been displayed 2 Personal computer and utility Personal computer does not start The system error screen has been displayed or shuts down e Page 179 Section 16 3 1 The operating syste
172. e 16 point register monitor are ones that have random access capability If a device that is not capable of random access is specified a device type error will occur For details of the random access capability of each device refer to the following manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 137 pasou aq 0 sediAeq uS ZL 12 6 Changing Current Values This section explains a method for changing current device values Point Precaution When changing data during an operation configure interlock circuits in a program to ensure the safe system operation Countermeasures against data communication errors should be arranged between a personal computer and a CPU module as a system 12 6 1 Changing word device double word device values Change word device double word device values The Continuous Change in Data function changes the values of continuous word devices double word devices to the same value Screen display W Device Write lt gt Data changing Continuous change in data lt For Data Changing gt lt For Continuous Change in Data gt Device Type Device Type JER extension file register gt Device Type 5PG special direct buffer register gt Block No Start VO No 1 6 DEC DeviceNo DeviceNo Points C HEX DEC C OCT fe Operating procedure 1 Set the type and number of devices whose current values are to be changed Item Description Set
173. e Event count SWO07A Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Event count SW007A and the update may be offset by one sequence scan This area is cleared when Event count clear SB0009 is turned ON Stores the own station s setting status for Data Link Faulty Station Setting Input data status of SB007B dein aaeeio OFF OFF or cleared to 0 y ON Hold Stores the own station s setting status for Output Setting during CPU STOP Hold clear status SBIA Tooting cpu sTo 7 o 3 ON Clear ALL OFF Stores the hardware test completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress Hardware test SB0090 ON Completed completion status If completed the completion status can be checked by Hardware test normal abnormal end SB0091 Stores the hardware test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion Hardware test normal ON Abnormal completion SB0091 abnormal end Conditions e This is enabled when Hardware test completion status SBO090 is ON Stores the self loopback test completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress Self loopback test SB0092 ON Completed completion status If completed the completion status can be checked by Self loopback test normal abnormal end SBO093 234 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the self loopback test normal completion or abnormal completion stat
174. e UOHeINBIUOD UBEIDS ZZ 133 12 3 Selecting Monitoring Method This section explains a method for selecting a monitoring method in Device Monitor Utility 12 3 1 Batch monitoring devices Batch monitor devices whose type is specified on the Device Setting screen Screen display VW Menu Batch monitor lt Bit devices gt lt Word devices gt oo co CO o _ Oo o ocprocrcr TO TCT CO CO Cc co co co co O oe co co coc CO co co co 0 0 00 0O ooo ooo oOo ce m ea lma oo oe a2 fe ee ee et ee ee ee Oo oo coc co CO moc CMe coco co co oO lo oo cv co co CO CO Co Co co co 00 0 00 oo ol oo ola ool oOo oa oa o o a a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Display contents Item Description Device information Display the current device status Display the monitoring target device names Display the monitoring result of each device e For bit device 0 OFF 1 ON e For word devices double word devices Values in set display format gt Page 141 Section 12 7 1 The number of displayed columns will differ depending on the settings of a connection target CPU and display format Monitoring result Screen button e _ button Scrolls the display area 134 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 3 2 Monitoring registered 16 point devices Monitor devices by specifying different types of devices in units of 16 points This function can monitor a maximum of five diffe
175. e arrival monitoring time at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station or target station has detected an error identify the cause of te eta te the error and take action Arrival monitoring time error e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation dedicated instruction eee l y l e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Correct the number of resends at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e When the own station or target station has detected an error identify the cause of the error and take action Number of resends error a e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation dedicated instruction A E i e When the mode of the master station is Online High Speed Mode change it to Online Normal Mode and retry the operation e Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly e Correct the network number at the request source of the dedicated instruction Target network No error and retry the operation dedicated instruction e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters SI BPOD 10113 6 94 are corre
176. e personal computer if its processing capability is lower for the desired processing 16 4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver The following shows the troubleshooting for error for the functions e Hardware error or board WDT error Page 182 Section 16 4 1 e Driver WDT error Page 183 Section 16 4 2 e Driver does not start 1 gt Page 183 Section 16 4 3 e Bus error Page 183 Section 16 4 4 1 6 4 1 Hardware error or board WDT error When the hardware error or board WDT error occurred check the following items Item Corrective action Is the board installed properly e Check the board installation status Page 190 Section 16 7 2 Does the board operate on other personal e After formatting the HD install the operating system again computer e Repair or replace the personal computer If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 202 Section 16 8 182 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 6 4 2 Driver WDT error When the driver WDT error occurred check the following items Item Corrective action Has the error occurred due to the system e Reset the board lt Page 128 Section 11 4 overload temporarily e Restart the personal computer e Remove the factor of system overload e Disable the driver WDT function or increase the driver WDT monitoring time Page 120 Section 10 2 5 Is the same error occurred repeatedly Is the system overloaded constantly 1 A driver WDT error may o
177. e selected station Station No for settin Specify a station number i Setting range 1 to 120 numerals 0 to 9 in 3 digits only 2 Clickthe button Point Adding a station set in Network Configuration Setting The external device on a slave station outputs data input from the master station simultaneously with configuration of the station number setting Therefore set the CPU module to STOP or check that outputs from the external device will not cause a problem beforehand A station number is not specified to the slave station For a method for canceling the station number set to the slave station in the CC Link IE Field Network Diagnostics refer to the manual of slave station being used usas0s sonsoubelp Bulkeydsig ZZE WIOMION PIP 4 J1 4UIT OD Bulsoubeig Zep 157 1 3 2 0 Communication test Perform a communication test on CC Link IE Field Network Screen display KO Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics c gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Communication Test button Communication Test Communication Test Contents Connected StationfOwn Target Station Network No 1 Network No 1 B Outward CT Station No _ Station No m Communication Data Setting Data Length 100 Byte Communication Count HZ Times Communication Monitoring Time os Second Check the transient communication rounte From the connected station to the destination station Communication Test
178. ecification L gt Page 39 Section 3 1 or clear from noise Check Corrective action Is the ambient temperature within the specified Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking range action such as removing heat source Check the wire and cable lengths and grounding condition of each Is there any noise affecting the system device and take measures against noise Page 44 CHAPTER 4 16 7 2 Check the board installation Check the board for an abnormal installation Check Corrective action e Remove the board and reinstall it Is the board properly installed e Change the board installation position e Fix the board firmly with screws e Remove the board which exceeds the maximum number of Is the applicable number of boards installed applicable boards 16 7 3 Checking cables and wiring Check if there is an error on the cable or hub disconnected connectors or improper wiring Check Corrective action Replace the cable with the 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cable Is the 1O0OOBASE T compliant Ethernet cable used Page 33 Section 2 4 1 Is the station to station distance 100m or less Change the station to station distance to 100m or less Does the cabling condition bend radius meet the Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable and correct the bend specification radius Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Replace the Ethernet cable e Check if the 1OOOBASE T compliant switching hu
179. ecking network status with CC Link IE Field Network 200 diagnostics Check the network condition on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen lt _ gt Page 147 Section 13 2 2 Check Are all installed boards displayed on the Select Diagnostics Destination Page 146 Section 13 2 1 Is an error displayed on the network configuration diagram Are details of the error station selected on the network configuration diagram displayed on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen e Is there any error log on the Network Event History screen L gt Page 161 Section 13 2 6 Corrective action e Check the channel numbers gt Page 195 Section 16 7 8 e Check the details of the communication error on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen Perform the troubleshooting described on the Error details screen gt Page 155 Section 13 2 2 7 e Click the button displayed when a error occurs on the Selected Station Communication Status Monitor screen and perform the troubleshooting described on the Error details screen lt _ gt Page 155 Section 13 2 2 7 The following are the causes for when details of the error station are not displayed e Master station duplication Station number duplication e Slave station type error Check the Board Diagnostics screen and identify the cause of the error Page 143 Section 13 1 If the error station is
180. ective action e Take corrective action following the message Is an error message displayed When the measurement displayed on the screen is not effective K Page 181 Section 16 3 4 e Check if the display setting is correct with Device Manager and install the appropriate display driver Is the display setting correct e Perform Windows Update e Change the hardware acceleration setting in the display setting Are other applications being executed e Close the screens of all other applications e Check the operating environment K Page 191 Section 16 7 4 Is there any error on the personal computer e Check the personal computer and operating system Page 191 Section 16 7 5 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to K Page 202 Section 16 8 180 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 3 4 Corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective When an unexpected screen is displayed or the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective check the following items The following table shows the corrective actions when the screen is displayed Item User Account Control screen User Account Control x Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before e l Setup exe baii Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used i
181. ects perform the project verification gt Page 109 Section 9 7 Display contents W Online gt Board Verify The verify result is displayed on the Verify Result screen S Verify Result Board Verify Parameter Source Project Name Project1 Destination Project Name in Board Source Data Name Destination Data Name Verify Result Mismatch in Number of Boards of CC IE Field Setting There were 1 parts not matched Unmatch Line 7 2 f0ldq pue pueog Jo sJajoweseY BUILA ELL 127 11 4 Resetting Board This section explains a method for resetting the board from CC IE Field Utility Display contents O Online gt Reset Operation Reset Operation Select Board Board ifChannel No 181 Board 2fCchannel Wo 182 Operating procedure 71 Check the check box of the board to be reset 2 Clickthe _ button The selected board is reset 128 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING CHAPTER 12 MONITORING This chapter explains the operation and setting methods of the monitoring function This function is performed using Device Monitor Utility For accessible devices refer to the MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 12 1 Overview of Device Monitor Utility 1 Overview Device Monitor Utility is a utility to monitor devices and change current values The utility is started from the menu of CC IE Field Utility or from Windows start lt CC IE Field Utility gt J CC IE Field Ut
182. ed Start Station Setting range 1 to the end slave station number Set the end station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned End Station Setting range Start station number to the end slave station number Start No Set the start number of link devices to be equally assigned Setting range 0 to 3FFO Set the total points of link devices to be equally assigned Setting range 16 to 16384 start number RWw RWr Equal Assignment Set the start station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned Setting range 1 to the end slave station number Total Points Assigned Start Station Set the end station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assigned End Station l Setting range Start station number to the end slave station number Set the start number of link devices to be equally assigned Start No Setting range 0 to 1FFC Set the total points of link devices to be equally assigned Setting range 4 to 8192 start number 2 Click the ok __ button Total Points Assigned 116 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 10 2 3 Network operation setting Set the parameter name and network operation at data link error Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen c gt Network Operation Setting Network Operation Setting Parameter Mame Data Link Faulty Station Setting
183. ed red Station No Unset Station number is not specified red 2 Display the mode It is not displayed if a station number is not specified 3 MAC address Display the MAC address 4 IP Address Displays an IP address only when it is set Display LED status and communication status of PORT1 and PORT2 5 LED Display the icon when the target station is disconnected 155 Screen button e Error buttons An error button is displayed when an error occurs on the CC Link IE Field Network board or connection cable The Error details screen is displayed by clicking the button e Station No Setting button This button is displayed when a station number is not specified for the selected station The Station number setting screen for changing the station number is displayed by clicking the button Selected Station Communication Status Monitor LI72GF15 T2 r MAC Address a a Station No Setting 156 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS a Specifying station number Specify a station number for the station number unspecified station when the connected station is a master station Screen display XW Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics c gt CC IE Field Network Diagnostics screen gt _ Station No Setting button Set Station No Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description MAC Address of select station Display the MAC address of th
184. ed Transient transmission is not stopped vr Station number 3 Personal Master station computer Board Slave station program User i Station number 2 Link refresh Driver Station i number RY RWw Station Station number 2 number 2 i I number 3 i Cyclic I 3 ee ew ee mmr eee eee ee eee ee eee ee Hee transmission stopped e e e e ee m m e e e e e mmm e eee ee el Station number 3 RY RWw Station number 3 e e e e e e e e e e e eee ee eee el se 3S Se Se Ss Ss Ss Ss ses Ss Ss Ss Ss es ee eB eB eee ee ee eee eS 1 Setting method Cyclic transmission stop and restart are operated on the Link Start Stop screen _ gt Page 160 Section 13 2 5 Point The link start stop is not available in loop test mode UOISSILUSUBI IIPAN Z S Ye soJ pue dois UOISSILUSUBI ONOAD GCG When the board is reset or the system is powered off and then on Even if cyclic transmission was stopped by link stop it will be restarted by resetting the board or powering off and then on the system Station where link start cannot be performed Link start cannot be performed in the following cases e Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error e Station where link was stopped by a command from another station e Station where link was stopped by link special relay SB or link special register SW
185. ed Retry it on the master station e Temporary error invalid station setting cancel by SB0010 and SB0011 and reserved station function disable enable by SB0012 and SB0013 cannot be executed at the same time e Turn off all bits in SB0010 to SB0013 and turn on only one bit of them in the relay e Check the setting and then stop or start data link 211 Error code D721H D722H D723H D724H D725H D726H D727H D728H D780H D781H D782H D783H to D784H D785H D786H D800H to D805H D806H D807H D80AH to D80FH D812H to D813H D814H to D819H D81AH D81BH 212 Corrective action Link start stop retry error to another station Link start stop retry error to own ee station e Retry the operation after stop or restart of cyclic transmission is completed Link start stop retry error to entire system Link start stop station error e Check the setting and then stop or start cyclic transmissions Station type error station i e A local station cannot start or stop data link of all or multiple stations Execute data executing data link start stop to link start stop of all or multiple stations from the master station the entire system Transient data request error e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Link start was instructed from a station different from the station that instructed the link stop The station instructing a link start
186. efer to K Page 202 Section 16 8 Point If Block Never install unsigned driver software is selected under Control Panel System Hardware Driver Signing the driver may not be installed Select Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action and install the driver 178 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 3 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility The following shows the troubleshooting for error for operation of a personal computer or utility e Personal computer does not start or shuts down L Page 179 Section 16 3 1 e Utility does not startup Page 180 Section 16 3 2 e The screen or operation is abnormal Page 180 Section 16 3 3 e Corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective Page 181 Section 16 3 4 e Personal computer operates slowly Page 182 Section 16 3 5 16 3 1 Personal computer does not start or shuts down When the personal computer on which the board is installed is not started or the system shut down or system reset is occurred check the items following the procedure shown below Point Do not delete or disable the driver on the Device Manager screen when the board is normally recognized If it is deleted or disabled the operating system may shut down blue screen 7 Uninstall the board and check if the personal computer is started e Checking personal computer and operating system
187. elect Classic View Select Administrative Tools Review your computer s status and resolve issues Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time a Windows Firewall Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall System and Security Network and Internet Hardware and Sound Programs User Accounts and Family rod Re ai RAM and d Check the Windows Experience Ind Appearance and s iew amount of an processor spee eck the indows perience index eee Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Clock Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Turn automatic updating on or off Checkforupdates View installed updates Power Options Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps Ita Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 d Administrative Tools W7 Free up diskspace Defragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions View event logs 8 Schedule tasks aBbessayy Buluse sMOpulIM LL xipueddy 4 To the next page ess w Bulusem BulusAdid 104 SPOYZ N Z XIpuaddy 269 From the previous page 4 4 Select Local Security Policy DO E gt comaa v Srteman
188. en received Stores the scan mode setting status OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode s17 GS Aej y Jeloeds yul xIpueddy Availability Number Description Master Local station station Operation status Stores the operating status during a CPU stop error due to parameters SB0073 specified for CPU stop OFF Stop O error ON Continue Stores the reserved station specification status due to parameters The station number set for a reserved station can be checked by Reserved station Reserved station a SB0074 oo specification SW00C0 to SWO00C7 specification status OFF Not specified ON Specified Stores the Error invalid station setting status due to parameters The station number set for the error invalid station can be checked by Error invalid station Error invalid station SB0075 setting SWOODO to SWO0D7 O setting status as OFF Not specified ON Specified Stores the parameter reception status from the master station Parameter reception SB0077 sialic OFF Reception completed O ON Reception not completed Stores the setting status of the loopback function configured by the parameter Loopback function SB0078 OFF Not used setting status J ON Used Stores the network event history occurrence OFF No event history ON Event history found If the event history is found the cumulative number of network event history SB007A Event history status O can be checked by th
189. ena edie wrt es boda Be 10 2 2 Network configuration setting 0 00 c eee ees 10 2 3 Network operation setting 0 2 00 cee 10 24 Event selling ii2ws we ee de a ooh sa RAG ow ew Sh RG Oe wore 10 275 Diver seting janie s2 are Rake hd ee Pee A ee Pee es 10 26 Targetseting es sw arte wcae di ieaiai Daum ean dd aia Ea a Oa 10 2 7 Routing parameters anaana aaaea eaa CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE 11 1 Setting Board Channel Numbers nananana naaa eaaa 11 2 Writing Reading Parameters to from Board 11 3 Verifying Parameters of Board and Project 11 4 Resetting Board naanaa aeaaaee CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 1 Overview of Device Monitor Utility nananana aaaea 12 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations of Device Monitor Utility 12 2 1 Start and completion oases sere aana anaa 12 2 2 Screen configuration and basic operations 12 2 3 Help TUNCHOT i4504 64s4c0e4buscanbeutecuaneceeesueeased 12 3 Selecting Monitoring Method aaa 12 3 1 Batch monitoring devices 0 0 cee ee ees 12 3 2 Monitoring registered 16 point devices 05 12 4 Setting Monitoring Target 0 2 cece ee ee 12 5 Setting Devices to be Monitored 00 ee eee 12 6 Changing Current Values 0 e eee eee eee 12 6 1 Changing word device double word device values 12 6 2 Turni
190. ent data Corrective action e Add a master station to the network e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Although change of the target station number was attempted online from the master station the target station does not have the online station number setting function e Check the manual for the target station for availability of the station number setting function e If the function is supported by the model please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the communication status of the station whose station number will be changed e Station number change was attempted for the own station master station e Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change e For the target station of station number change a station number has already been set e Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change e The tar
191. ent information of the product The serial number displayed in the Board Diagnostics screen in the CC IE Field Utility indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added 264 APPENDIX Appendix 1 ONew and Improved Functions Appendix 10 1 Change of hardware function The following table shows the new or improved function for CC Link IE Field Network board i First five digits of the Software version of New and improved function serial number SW1DNC CCIEF B Parameter setting function for CC Link IE Field Network remote device station 15102 or higher 1 06G or later mdRemBufWriteEx function mdRemBufReadEx function Change of the calculation method for maximum data link rocessing time when the station is disconnected from or j i Pp 17022 or higher returned to the network which is used for the link scan time formula Appendix 10 2 Update of software package For details of the update version software and the functions which are added or changed please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Point For the precautions when installing the software package refer to L gt Page 88 Section 6 1 Appendix 11 Windows Warning Message Appendix 11 1 Overview of warning message When using an operating system with the user account control function a warning message appears when the utility is activated lt
192. environment that meets the general specifications in this manual Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product 2 Precautions for personal computer installation environment e Always ground the personal computer to the protective ground conductor Failure to do so may cause a malfunction 4 3 3 Procedure for replacing mounting brackets The following shows the procedure for replacing a standard size mounting bracket with a low profile size mounting bracket Standard size mounting bracket Screw Start Loosen the screws Remove a standard size mounting bracket uoellesu EV Adjust a low profile size mounting bracket to holes for fixing the mounting bracket of board Tighten the screws JUSWUOJIAUS uonejlesu ZEY Low profile size mounting bracket Completion 14 Keep the unused brackets for system reconfiguration 2 Screw tightening torque 0 425 to 0 575Nem 4 34 to 5 86kgfecm 49 4 3 4 Board installation The following flowchart shows the board installation procedure Vv Power OFF Power OFF the personal computer Install the board Install the board to a slot on a personal computer v Fix the board Fix the board to a slot on the personal computer using the board fixing screws v Power ON the personal computer 1 Precautions for turning on e Turn off the external
193. er module Station that controls the entire network Cyclic and transient transmission can be performed with all stations One master station is required per network Cyclic and transient transmission can be performed with the master station and other local stations The local station controls modules such as a CPU module by its programs Station where cyclic transmission of bit by bit input output signals is performed with the master station Station where cyclic transmission of bit by bit input output signals and word by word input output data is performed with the master station Transient transmission can be also performed The station returns a response to transient transmission request from other stations The station also issues transient transmission request to other stations Station that handles bit and word data It can communicate with the master and local stations only and not with other remote I O stations remote device stations or intelligent device stations Both cyclic and transient transmissions are available Generic term for the stations other than the master station local station remote I O station remote device station and intelligent device station Station that is not actually connected but must be included in the total number of the stations on the network since it is to be connected in the future Station that comprises of a programmable controller and multiple network modules and that relays data link c
194. er to 1 in this section 1 An unexpected value is set to the specific link device Check the following items Item Is there a link error station Is the parameter assignment range correct Is the link device accessed using a user program Is the link device accessed from a sequencer in the network Corrective action Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Page 200 Section 16 7 12 Check the Network Configuration Setting of the master station Page 113 Section 10 2 2 Check the argument of the communication function accessing to the link device Check the device range used in the sequence program 187 p woj d ag JOUULD UOISSILUSUBI DIOAD 1 99 SS9DNV SOIANG JO Bunooysesyqnol L 9 9 16 6 2 Transient transmission cannot be performed The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and the transient transmission cannot be performed Example e Data cannot be written to the accessed station e Data from the accessed station cannot be read Monitoring cannot be performed with the utility e Data cannot be read written when accessing to device using a communication function of the user program When transient transmissions cannot be executed to the target station check the following items Item Is the D LINK LED of the master or slave station ON or flashing Is the baton passing status of the target station normal
195. etwork in the future must be included in the total number of stations for the network Reserved stations are not detected as error stations even though they are not actually connected When the reserved station function is disabled a slave station specified as a reserved station can be canceled temporarily 1 Reserved station specification A slave station can be specified as a reserved station in the Network Configuration Setting gt Page 113 Section 10 2 2 A ps mr ponn asagat a fasetgtge pangot w Not actually connected il I iy Master station Slave station Slave station Slave station Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 2 Station No 3 Reserved station Network Configuration Setting Se Setting TOE A Setting Humber a PLCs Station Mo Station Type ae Reserved Error Invalid Station pot Local Station cooo oor 8 ooon No Setting x a E E O 0008 cor TRT OC a ainteligent Device Station tej oozo ooze a ooo Select Reserved Station 2 Reserved station function disable and cancel This is used when connecting a reserved status slave station to the network Reserved station function disable and cancel is set on Reserved Station Function Enable screen L gt Page 163 Section 13 2 7 uonouny siqesiq uonouny UONeIS perlesey pue UONeoOyIO9dS UOI eE S PeAJOSOY G S 83 5 6 Error Invalid Station and Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting Function When a slave
196. f the master local module e When activating as a local station by the CCPASET instruction use a master local module with a serial number whose first five digits are 12072 or higher e When activating as a local station set a value within the range from 3101H to 3178H to Switch 2 in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master local module e Set 0 to Switch 3 in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master local module e Correct the request command at the request source and retry the operation e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e When the receiving station encountered overloading of transient data send the data from the source after a give time has elapsed e Temporarily stop the transient transmission and then retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Using the COM instruction increase the processing frequency of transient transmission e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 209 D283H D2A0H D2A1H D2A2H D2A3H to D2ADH D2AEH D2AFH D2BOH D602H to D609H D60AH D60DH to D610H D611H to D618H 210 Transient transmission failed Receive buffer full Send buffer full Transmission completion wait timer timeout Error in transient data
197. ff on a system on a slave station or the switching hub TERE e Connecting disconnecting an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub PAESE e Disconnecting an Ethernet cable from a slave station and connecting it to another slave station or the switching hub e Simultaneously turning off on systems on multiple stations Line topology ring topology e Simultaneously connecting disconnecting Ethernet cables to from multiple stations When a data link error station returns a data link error will occur in all the stations Instantaneous error on all stations Insertion removal or turning OFF ON For a measure to above error set the network operation setting to maintain inputs from data link error station when outputs need to be maintained at an occurrence of a data link error Point Data link error in all stations when starting a personal computer Errors occur in all stations when a personal computer is started This is because the line between P1 and P2 of CC Link IE Field Network board is disconnected under the following conditions e The power of the personal computer is turned OFF The line becomes in a conduction state when the power is turned ON e A reconnection is in progress when starting a board driver As a result the following reconnection which causes an error in all station occurs e A reconnection of CC Link IE Field Network board installed in a personal computer e A reconnection of stati
198. filename is disabled perform the operation 1 in this section 2 Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 3 Display the Run screen from the WindowsR Start Menu or Quick Access Menu 4 Append A and execute Disk1 Setup exe of the CD ROM 5 Install the utility again by following the installation procedure 6 Perform the uninstallation N If the utility cannot be uninstalled normally check if the personal computer has any problems e Operating Environment K Page 191 Section 16 7 4 e Checking personal computer and operating system Page 191 Section 16 7 5 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to L Page 202 Section 16 8 172 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Operation for the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled 1 Enable the creation of 8 3 filename 2 Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive 3 Display the Run screen from the Start menu or Quick Access Menu of Windows 4 Append G and execute Disk1 Setup exe on the CD ROM J Perform the uninstallation Point The option to append G to Startup exe is supported only by SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later pojlej UOHee suluf CC OL UONe e SUIUN UOHe e Su 10 Buooyse qnos Z 9 173 16 2 3 Action displayed on the screen is not effective while installation The action when the screen is displayed is shown below 1 Using Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows
199. fset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF D D Stores the stop error status of the master station s CPU module OFF Normal CPU operation status ON Stop error occurred SB0101 master station 1 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the continuation error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with continuation error found If a station with a continuation error is found the status of each station can be checked by the CPU operation status each station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 CPU operation status SB0110 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the CPU operation status each each station 2 s17 gS Aejay jeloeds yul xIpueddy station 2 SW0110 to SW0117 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the continuation error status of the master station s CPU module OFF Normal CPU operation status ON Continuation error occurred SB0111 master station 2 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF 237 Number SB0120 SB0121 SB0130 SB0131 SB0140 238 PORT1 error frame reception status each station PORT1 error frame reception status master station PORT2 e
200. g time of the CC Link IE Field Network consists of the time components below Sequence scan Link refresh time Link scan time Slave station processing time Transmission delay time Personal computer User station program board Link device Slave station Link device External aes aea Processing time of slave station E FXIETRA device Driver Link scan Link time refresh time o m m m m m m m e m mmm mmm m m mwm e e e e e e e e e e e E E E E E E E so me eee SF SF SF Ss Ss Ss PSP Ps Ps Ps es ee M M e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Link refresh time gt Page 258 Appendix 5 1 e Link scan time lt gt Page 258 Appendix 5 2 e Slave station processing time Manual for the slave station used e Transmission delay time _ gt Page 259 Appendix 5 3 aul Bulsseo0jg G xipueddy 257 Appendix 5 1 Link refresh time The following is a calculation formula for the link refresh time Number of boards that can be installed x 1 ms lt For Intel Core 2 Duo processor 1 8GHz gt With a single board installed the link refresh time of maximum link device points 36k bytes is less than 1ms Point Affection by other driver processing and Windows kernel processing The execution of the link refresh processing may be delayed by the interruption of other driver processing or Windows kernel processing Appendix 5 2 Link scan time The f
201. ge Directive 00 281 Appendix 15 External Dimensions 4 222 ccavusdudausdcesededercectteseeneeseceneeeen 282 Appendix 15 1 Q80BD J71GF11 T2 ca 2s u e 4 4 de fo et ee ee he ee 2 ae eke ee 282 Appendix 152 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 2s cs askew h dscedwiaad sas deatdvicawiuaacau a 283 INDEX 284 REVISION eenen a A E E EEE eee 286 E EET EEEE ENEE E TEE EOE EEEE E E E E E ae E be oak oun 289 15 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following page illustration is for explanation purpose only and the content is different from the actual page CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission can be stopped Data reception from the slave stations The chapter of and data transmission from the own station can be stopped The stopped cyclic transmission can be restarted lt sh f i the current page snows reference Transient transmission is not stopped gt Page 157 Section 13 2 5 an IS SNOWN pages Station number 3 4 Slave station i I Station 4 Station number 1 number 1 number 2 number 2 Station Station number 3 number 3 Station number 2 RY RWw Station an EA DA The section of p Cyclic z ox transmission z g the current page stopped 5 4 F is shown E 1 Setting method 33 Do Cyclic transmission stop and restart are operated on the Link Start Stop screen _ g
202. get station of station number change does not exist e Check if no station number has been set for the target station of station number change e Check the communication status e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the following settings at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation D240H Network number D241H Target station number D242H Command code D243H Channel used correct within the range e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the transient data at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the target station number at the request source of the dedicated instruction and retry the operation e If the request source resides in another network check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action e Correct the transient
203. handling and installation environment of the CC Link IE Field Network board 4 3 1 Handling precautions The following explains precautions for handling 1 Precautions for turning on Do not touch any connectors while power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunction 2 Handling precautions of the board Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the board Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the board Do not disassemble or modify the board Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or fire Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction Handle the board in a place where static electricity will not be generated Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction Do not drop or apply a strong impact to the board Doing so may cause a failure or malfunction CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 3 2 Installation environment For installation of the personal computer in which the CC Link IE Field Network board is installed refer to the manual for the personal computer 1 Precautions for board installation environment e Use the board in an
204. he Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the Send receive instruction own station s channel 1 1 processing result 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion lt gt Page 203 Section 16 9 SW0030 Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used the Send receive instruction own station s channel 2 2 processing result 0 Normal completion 1 or higher Abnormal completion lt gt Page 203 Section 16 9 SWwo0040 Nioawornunmiber Stores the network number of own station Range 1 to 239 Stores the station number of own station SW0042 Station number Range 125 master station 1 to 120 slave station 0 station number is SW0031 not set 242 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the mode of own station 0 Online Normal Mode Local station Online 1 Online High Speed Mode 2 Offline SW0043 Mode status 6 Loop test 7 Self loopback test 9 Hardware test Stores the own station s hardware status b15 to b2 b1 bO O swo046 Module type PATTER of o h Module type 00 Module 01 Board 10 Display Stores the baton pass status for the own station transient transmission possible 0 Data link in progress Baton pass status own SW0047 tation 2 Baton pass in progress sta 3 Baton pa
205. he CC Link IE Field Network Page 53 Section 4 5 2 Self loopback test board alone including the send receive circuit of Page 54 Section 4 5 4 the transmission system and cables View gt Page 110 CHAPTER 10 Network Parameter Parameter Setting Set the network parameters Online gt Read from Board Page 126 Section 11 2 Write to Board Channel number Set channel numbers of the CC Link IE Field Online gt Page 125 Section 11 1 setting Network board Channel No Setting Check the line status in the network system and i i Loop test a Diagnostics Page 59 Section 4 7 1 parameter setting status of each station Board Diagnostics Check disconnections and incomplete connections Test after Cable test Page 61 Section 4 7 2 wiring of Ethernet cables Diagnostics gt Check whether the communication route of the CC IE Field Diagnostics Page 62 Section 4 7 3 Setting Communication a ca transient transmission from the own station to a communication target is correct Online gt Device Monitor Page 129 CHAPTER 12 Utility Device monitor Start Device Monitor Utility and monitor devices Monitor CC Link IE Field Debug Network Diagnostics gt Check error locations error causes and event CC IE Field Page 145 Section 13 2 histories diagnostics Diagnostics Reset operation Reset the board online er Page 128 Section 11 4 Reset Operation
206. he execution of restart appears at the completion of uninstallation Select Yes want to restart my computer now and restart the personal computer MELSECPowerManager may not be uninstalled depending on the installation state which affects the other installed software packages For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following appendix lt gt Page 275 Appendix 13 2 When uninstallation is completed normally When the uninstallation is completed normally the icons registered in the Windows Start are deleted 3 When uninstallation is failed When the uninstallation is failed take corrective actions following the troubleshooting Page 172 Section 16 2 2 uoejje suluN 9 91 CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF CCIE FIELD UTILITY CC IE Field Utility is software to display settings and status of the CC Link IE Field Network board For installing and uninstalling the utility gt Page 88 CHAPTER 6 7 1 Overview Use CC IE Field Utility to perform the following functions Item Description Description Meu Reference Check the hardware of the Bus I F function of the Bus I F test Page 52 Section 4 5 1 CC Link IE Field Network board Check the memory of the CC Link IE Field Network Memory test board Test before Diagnostics gt Check the hardware in the CC Link IE Field wiring H W test Board Diagnostics Page 53 Section 4 5 3 Network board Test the hardware of t
207. he user program when the event conditions are met By using this function the link devices can be monitored efficiently without reading link devices regularly by the user program Personal computer Board aA ea ENNA A A ike O eek ae Setting of event condition S Conditions amp Event condition oo EE S mdOpen 181 1 amp path mdWaitBdEvent path eventno e main Event notification t Link device RX RY RWw RWr change An mdClose path Network status Receive the event notification using SB SW change the mdWaitBdEvent function fT Data reception status of specified channel RECV reception Set the event condition Link devices set for the event condition are checked every link scan When the event conditions are met an event notification is issued every link refresh cycle gt Page 120 Section 10 2 5 Receive the event notification using the mdWaitBdEvent function in the user program uonouny JUSAQ J s 1 Setting method Event conditions are set on the Event setting screen gt Page 118 Section 10 2 4 Specify event numbers set by the mdWaitBdEvent function of MELSEC data link library 85 5 8 Loopback Function This function disconnects the station in which an error has occurred from the network and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally Stations connected after the faulty station ca
208. hi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 289 Microsoft Windows Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server Visual Basic Visual C Visual Studio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Intel Core 2 Duo is trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corp Oracle and Java are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 290 OH NA O80980ENG I 1506 KWIX MODEL SW1 CCIEF B U E MODEL CODE 13JZ58 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications
209. hile power is on Doing so may result in a malfunction CAUTION Thoroughly read the manual and ensure the safety before performing program modification during operation forced output operation such as RUN STOP and PAUSE An improper operation will result in mechanical damage or accidents Do not disassemble or modify the boards Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or board resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction The board is included in an antistatic envelope When storing or transporting it be sure to put it in the antistatic envelope Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction The microprocessor built in the board will reach a high temperature during operation Do not touch it directly when replacing the board Doing so may result in a failure malfunction or injury Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial w
210. ible to view the list of reserved stations Enabled reserved stations will remain active until the master station sub master station master operation is turned OFF or reset At that time all reserved stations will be restored according to the parameters in the master station Reserved Station List m Legend Operation Method 15 Reserved Station 15 Reserved Station Reserved Station No Setting 15 Unassigned station number Function Disable Not Selectable Not selectable Operation Method 1 Set a station to reserved station errors by clicking the appropriate station number box 2 Click the apply OK button to reflect the changes EE Reserved Station me Station To Enable Reserved To Disable Station Function i Cancel Operating procedure 1 Select reserved stations to be canceled temporarily or reserved again from Reserved Station List 2 Click the button The selected reserved stations are canceled temporarily or reserved again When the process is completed the contents of Reserved Station List are updated Point Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect the temporary cancellation of reserved station specification Resetting master station or turning OFF the system The temporary cancellation of reserved station specification is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the master station s network parameter
211. ibrary is used to access the Redundant CPU during system switching being processed by the Redundant CPU a system switching error error code 4248H CPU starting error error code 40044 other system CPU module error error code 4245n access destination illegal error error code FFDFH or similar error occurs In this case create a user program that checks the error code and performs retry processing as necessary a The following indicates the functions that result in error if executed during system switching aa ee Functions that result in error by system switching mdDevSetEx mdDevRstEx mdRandREx mdRandWEx mdReceiveEx MELSEC data link library mdSendEx mdControl mdDevRst mdDevSet mdRandR mdRandW mdReceive mdSend mdTypeRead 217 W JS S Nda uepunp y Puiss 2 y 104 suoNed ld xipueddy b Error occurrence The following example gives a flowchart for error occurrence at batch write Write processing mdSend instruction etc Check the error code Does the error require retry processing NO YES Retry processing Execute normal processing 1 For details and corrective action of the error code refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Execute retry processing as required depending on the system specifications 4 Automatic switching of communication path When a communication error occurs du
212. ics of 37dB maximum and 30dB average measured at 3m distance 30 to 300MHz b Wiring power and ground cables e Provide a ground point to the control panel near the power supply module Ground the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module to the ground point with the thickest and shortest ground cable possible 30cm or shorter 3 Cables Use a shielded cable for the cable extended out of the control panel If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly the noise immunity will not meet the required value a CC Link IE Field Network cables The precautions for using CC Link IE Field Network cables are described below e Use CC Link IE Field Network cables SC E5EW S LIM manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd e A CC Link IE Field Network cable is a shielded cable Remove a part of the shield as shown below and ground the largest possible exposed section to the ground CC Link IE Field Network cable Shield 280 APPENDIX b Grounding cables with a cable clamp Ground the shield of the external wiring cable to the control panel with the AD75CK cable clamp Mitsubishi Ground the shield within 20 to 30cm from the module CC Link IE Field Network board Inside the control panel 20 to 30cm For details on the AD75CK refer to the following LLIJAD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual 4 Noise filter power supply line filter Noise filter is
213. iction Policies gt a IP Security Policies on Local Compute E Application Control Policies Application Control Policies gt Advanced Audit Policy Configuration 8 IP Security Policies on Local Computer Internet Protocol Security IPsec Administratio Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Advanced Audit Policy Configuration L Auditing user rights y E Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Windows Firewall with Advanced Security E Network List Manager Policies Network name icon and location group policies 6 Select Security Options File Action View Help es 26 Xi amp Security Settings Name Description gt E Account Policies T Audit Policy Audit Policy gt A Local Policies gt D Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec Network List Manager Policies b Public Key Policies gt E Software Restriction Policies gt E Application Control Policies gt amp PP Security Policies on Local Compute b 1 Advanced Audit Policy Configuration E User Rights Assignment User Rights Assignment 4 To the next page 270 From the previous page 4 Hile Action View Help e9 AMX EL H m 7 APPENDIX 7 Select User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin B Security Settings Policy Security Setting bl Account Policies E Network security Restrict NTLM NTLM authentication in th
214. ide the hardware by the timer function on CC Link IE Field Network board When the driver cannot reset the timer of the board within the specified driver WDT monitoring time CC Link IE Field Network board detects driver WDT error Driver WDT function detects driver operation delay due to the access error from the driver to CC Link IE Field Network board or system high load 1 Driver WDT settings For the setting methods refer to the following section KL Page 120 Section 10 2 5 The driver WDT function is set to invalid as a default 2 When the driver WDT error has occurred The following shows the operation when driver WDT error has occurred a CC Link IE Field Network board and the driver stop communication and are disconnected from the network in order to avoid an erroneous output When the Driver WDT function confirmed the CC Link IE Field Network board in which a driver WDT error is occurred from other station a CPU stop error occurs b RUN LED flicks and RD LED turns ON on the CC Link IE Field Network board c 28158 9202H Driver WDT error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Field Network board from the application program in which the CC IE Field Utility and MELSEC data link library function are used Point e When the multiple applications in which MELSEC data link library is used are executed driver WDT error is returned to all the programs However only the CC Link IE Field Network board in which the driver
215. ient data resides in another network check if the routing parameters for respective stations are correctly set and take corrective action DOA4H to DOAGH Transient transmission failed e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 and retry the operation e Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation e Perform hardware and self loopback tests _ gt Page 53 Section 4 5 3 Page 54 Section 4 5 4 DOA7H Transient reception failed 203 SI BPOD 10113 691 DOCOH to DODOH DOEOH DOE1H DOE2H DOE3H DOE4H Process error Station type mismatch Own station specified as reserved Station No duplication own station Own station No out of range Multiple master stations including own station Corrective action e The error occurs in the following process Wait for a while and retry the operation DOCOH Reserved station specification DOC1H Disabling the reserved station DOC2H Data link stop instruction DOC3xH Data link start instruction DOC4H Temporary error invalid station setting DOC5nH Cancellation of temporary error invalid station setting DOC6H Change of other station number setting DODOnH Other station number setting e In Network Configuration Setting of the master station change the station type to that of the own station e In Network Configuration Setting of the ma
216. ient humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing 0 Storage ambient humidity Under intermittent vibration Constant Frequency Half amplitude Sweep count acceleration each in X Y Z 2 Under continuous vibration Constant Frequency Half amplitude Sweep count acceleration Compliant with Vibration resistance JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131 2 Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B 3502 and IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y Z directions Q m Operating atomosphere No corrosive gases S Operating altitude O to 2000 m a D Installation location Inside a control panel S O Q Overvoltage category 7 Il or less 7 Pollution degree 2 or less 1 Do not use or store the board under the environment where the atmospheric pressure is higher than the one at the altitude of 0 m Doing so may cause a malfunction 2 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 3 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution degree 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing mus
217. ified and CC Link IE Field Network board may not operate properly INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing Q8OBD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board This manual describes CC Link IE Field Network and the system configuration specifications operating procedure functions and troubleshooting of the Interface Board Before using this product please read this manual and the related manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual RELATED MANUALS Manual name lt Manual number model code gt MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual lt SH 080917ENG 13JZ47 gt MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual lt SH 080972ENG 13JZ54 gt MELSEC L CC Link IE Field Network Head Module User s Manual lt SH 080919ENG 13JZ48 gt CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual lt SH 080939ENG 13JZ50 gt MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual lt SH 081035ENG 13JV25 gt Description Overview of the CC Link IE Field Network and specifications procedures before oper
218. il the present at the master station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received at least once O Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at each station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 O Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT2 error frame detection each station SW0150 to SW0157 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the master station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received at least once O Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the parameter status for each station OFF No parameter errors for any stations ON Parameter error detected at one or more stations If a parameter error occurs the status of each station can be checked by the Parameter error status each station SW0170 to SW0177 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Pa
219. ility Device Monitor Utility lt Device Monitor Utility gt Device Monitor Utility Menu Setting Device Write Data Format Option Help lt 181 CC IE Field p Data Format The Channel Information in the Current Display Screen Network No 0 Station No 255 lt Windows start menu gt All Programs ff MELSEC gt Te Device Monitor Utility by MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 2 Log Off 0 Shut Down i T CCIE Field Board 2 Operation flow The following flowchart shows a basic monitoring operation flow Start Start Device Monitor Utility L gt Page 131 Section 12 2 1 Select a monitoring method 7S Page 134 Section 12 3 Specify a monitoring target 7 gt gt Page 136 Section 12 4 Specify devices to be monitored gt gt Page 137 Section 12 5 Change current values gt Page 138 Section 12 6 Switch the display format EF Page 141 Section 12 7 Completion niii 129 AJIN JOWUOW 89148 JO M N AO L Z 130 Point Buffer memory of CC Link IE Field Network remote device station cannot be monitored with the Device Monitor Utility When an error occurred in the Device Monitor Utility check the occurred error code in the list on MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 3 Menu list The following explains the functions of Device Mo
220. in CC IE Field Utility Page 143 Section 13 1 2 Set Mode to Bus I F Test and click the Mode Bus LF Test Start Test Start Test button lt Normal completion gt 3 The result is displayed on Test Result field lf the test completes abnormally consult your local Bus IF Test was normaly completed Mitsubishi service center or representative lt Abnormal completion gt Bus IF Test was abnormaly completed 52 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 5 2 Memory test Memory test checks the hardware of the memory function of the CC Link IE Field Network board The following shows a procedure for performing a test 1 Select a board to be tested on the Board Channel No fie Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility Page 143 Section 13 1 2 Set Mode to Memory Test and click the Mode Memory Test Start Test Start Test button lt Normal completion gt 3 The result is displayed on Test Result field If the test completes abnormally consult your local Test Result Memory Test was normaly completed a Mitsubishi service center or representative lt Abnormal completion gt Test Result Memory Test was abnormaly completed 4 5 3 Hardware test Hardware test checks the hardware in the CC Link IE Field Network board The following shows a procedure for performing a test 1 Select a board to be tested on the Board Channel No fie Diagnostics screen in CC I
221. ing operation without displaying warning message The following shows a procedure for allowing an operation without displaying a warning message A Getting Started k5 Connect to a Projector se Windows Fax and Scan a Remote Desktop Connection Ae Magnifier gt All Programs Search programs and files p gz LA MX Documents Pictures Music Computer Control Panel Devi Default Programs Help and Support Shut down ma JQ E eoma Tel ee aee OOO e Adjust your computer s settings System and Security Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems _ Network and Internet Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Add a device Connect to a projector Adjust commonly used mobility settings Programs Uninstall a program View by Category User Accounts and Family Safety Add or remove user accounts Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display Control Panel Home Action Center Open Control Panel Select System and Security REMARKS APPENDIX When using Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 s
222. ink faulty station ON a Error f J Tel aE Setting in the Network status on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen The temporary error invalid station setting restoration can be performed from the network configuration of Network Status on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen The menu is displayed by right clicking the target station gt Page 152 Section 13 2 2 5 a 164 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS Point Parameter setting The network parameter does not reflect temporary error invalid station setting Resetting the master station or powering off the system Temporary error invalid station setting is reset and the slave station returns to the status set by the master station s network parameter Disconnecting a station for which temporary error invalid station setting has been configured If the master station is reset the master station and local stations will differ in the following e ERR LED status e Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SW00E7 The difference can be corrected by the following procedure 1 Reconnect the disconnected station 2 Configure temporary error invalid station setting and then cancel the setting 165 SJOJJO UOH E S BJOUB ajqesiq e qeuy gQ Z EL WIOMION PIP 4 J1 4UIT OD Buisoubeig Zep CHAPTER 14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 166 This chapter explains the features of the functions provided by the library These functions are
223. ion 1 06G or later Windows 8 1 35 yus wuoaug Bunesado SZ b User authority Log on as a user having administrator authority e Installation and uninstallation are available only by the administrator s authority e The Usage of utilities is available only by the administrator s authority c NET Framework 3 5 When using one of the following operating system NET Framework 3 5 is required e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel d Update Windows 8 1 Updating Windows 8 1 is not supported When updating Windows 8 1 install SW1DNC CCIEF B with the software version 1 06G or later after uninstalling the software package and updating Windows 8 1 e The functions cannot be used The following functions of operating system cannot be used If an attempt is made to use any of the following functions this product may not operate normally e Activating the application with Windows compatible mode e Simplified user switch over e Remote desktop e Large font size Advanced setting of screen property e DPI setting other than 100 set the size of text and illustration other than Smaller 100 e Power save mode Standby Hibernate Sleep e Fast startup e The language switching function set by Regional and Language Options e Windows XP Mode e
224. ion Data Setting Station No 0 Station No 2 Communication Count 1 Times di eng etaie nists BBE Select Diagnostics lt gt CC IE Field Diagnostics 4 C gt Communication Test button Check the transient communication rounte from the connected station to the destination station Communication Test x Click the button to perform the communication test If an error occurs take actions Connected Station Own m Target Station Communication Data Setting NetworkNo T eae pe 100 DA according to the error message Outward Station No Station No Communication Count 1 Times Inward Communication Monitoring Time 5 Second Execute Test Check the transient communication rounte from the connected station to the destination station Communication Test Result E r Connected Station Own Target Station Communication Information Outward Network No 2 Network No 2 Communication Count 1 Times Station No 0 air Station No 2 Communication Time 0 ms Communication test has been completed Outward Inward Network No Own Station Target Station Point When conducting the test on relay stations set the receiving relay station in Communication Destination Setting Setting the sending relay station will cause an error Network No 1 Network No 2 Station No 0 Buin Joy SIS L Z Y
225. ions Item CC Link Ver 2 board CC Link IE Field Network board Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 PCI bus slot PCI Express slot Installation slot PCI slot PCI Express slot PCI X slot Standard Low profile 121 H x 121 H x 80 H x External dimensions 121 H x 19 W x 153 D mm 18 5 W x 18 5 W x 18 5 W x 181 D mm 181 D mm 181 D mm Weight 0 11kg 0 11kg 0 08kg 0 07kg 2 Functional comparison a Added functions The following are the functions added in the CC Link IE Field Network This mode can be selected for optimizing the performance of cyclic transmission based on the frequencies of cyclic transmission and Page 112 Section transient transmission 10 2 1 The mode can be selected from Online Normal mode and Page 260 Appendix 6 Online High speed mode Cyclic Mode selection for transmission cyclic transmission Setting the routing parameters beforehand also enables transient transmission to stations in different networks Communication is also possible with the CC Link IE Controller Network and MELSECNET H Network configuration The network configuration can be checked by the CC Link IE Field i E Page 145 Section 13 2 display Network diagnostics of CC Link IE Field Utility Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of Loop test Page 59 Section 4 7 1 each station CC Link IE Field Cable test Check the connection status of the Ether
226. ions higher than the maximum station number are ignored Stores the setting status of the temporary error invalid station 0 Other than temporary error invalid station 1 Temporary error invalid station b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 swooeo 6115 4 13 2 0 9 8 7 5 5 3 2 1 smoor 2 sr s0 20 28127 28 25 2a 25122121 0 16 7 swone2 se a7 as as 40 43 42 41 40 30 36 37 965 20 SWO0ES 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swooea co 70 77 76 75 74 72 72 71 70 60 6 7 65 65 SWO0EO vag SW00 5 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 6 85 84 83 82 81 to Teorey enor invalid SWDEG 1 12 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 1021101 100 99 98 97 O swoog7 son Sting swooe fr2oft 9 1 18 117 116 115 114 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO0A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number SI7 MS Ja sI6ey Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy are ignored 251 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the RUN status of each station 0 RUN STEP RUN 1 STOP
227. irmation When the target station is on another network The process is completed when data arrives at the relay station on the same network Completed e With arrival confirmation The process is completed when data is stored in the target station ee Target station Completed When Without arrival confirmation is specified the result is regarded as normal on the own station even if the sending to the target station fails as follows e When communication ends normally even though sent data are abnormal e When data cannot be stored in the target station because data is sent to the same station from multiple stations Completed uopPun4 AOAY GNAS VS 19 80 3 RECV function The RECV function reads data received by the board from the other station using the mdReceive mdReceiveEx function of MELSEC data link library function Send source Own station CPU module Target station User application main mdOpen 181 1 amp path Channel 1 x Channel 1 SEND mdReceiveEx path 0 255 Channel 2 Channel 2 ae mdClose path a Reception buffer of RECV function Reception buffer of RECV function is a function in which a driver executes the RECV function automatically and received data are stored to reception buffers of each channel number in the driver Set the Reception buffer of RECV function in the driver setting of the network parameter Page 120 Section 10 2 5 e With
228. is function for debugging purposes to stop the station from receiving data from other stations and sending its own data Screen display XW Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt Link Start Stop button Link Start Stop m Connected Station Information Network Type ke IE Field Network No 1 Station Type haster Station Station No 0 Link Start Stop Setting Contents All Stations Information Select All Clear All Selections a en ee Lil 0 Operating Master Station m Link Start Stop Executing Contents Link Start Link Stop Forced Link Start Forced Link Start will be executed for the station that is link stopped by other stations or the station that is link stopped by special relay special ister Issuing request for link start stop contents in stations that are on selected status in all stations information Link status might not be changed immediately because of circuit status Factor Please reopen window or check in network configuration when there is no change in link status Close Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Network Information Connected Station Display the network information of the connected station Information Link Start Stop Setting Contents Display the link status of all stations on the same network which are performing the data All Stations Informatio
229. is function monitors the operation of the software operating Page 85 Section 5 7 Page 118 Section 10 2 4 Page 87 Section 5 9 system driver inside the hardware The parameters of CC Link IE Field Network remote device station l l l MELSEC Data Link Library can be set by using mdRemBufWriteEx function or Reference Manual mdRemBufReadEx function 65 5 2 5 2 1 66 Cyclic Transmission Data communication is available periodically among stations on the same network Link devices RX RY RWw and RWr are used Data flow and link device assignment 1 Master and slave stations except for local stations One to one communication is possible between the master and slave stations The status information of the link devices RY RWw of the master station is output to the external device of the slave station and the input status information from the external device of the slave station is stored in the link devices RX RWr of the master station eo 6 36 Se B Ss Ss SP SP BP SB BP BP SP BP BP BP ET SE ET SE EL Master station Slave station Board Station Station number 1 Station Station number 2 number 2 Station number 1 RY RWw Station a Q EA External device E Area for sending to other stations 2e External device e Output from the master station The status data of the user program are stored in the driver by MD function The status data of the driver
230. is setting is enabled on the master station integrity of the data for all stations is assured for each station CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting Loopback Function Setting f Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other b Access to link devices During a link refresh data are assured for each station as shown below CC Link IE Field Network Board Driver Link device y x i E p Data Station Station Data gt lt assurance l assurance o G a Data Station Station Data So assurance No 2 No 2 assurance D Link refresh S Data Station Station Data g S assurance No 3 No 3 assurance 5 a Data Data F assurance assurance 5 g lt 11 5 2 4 Input status of data link error station setting Input data from the data link faulty station can be either cleared or held with the CC Link IE Field Network board Input data Range where the settings are enabled Input status in case of failure RX and RY Master station RX Clearing or holding the input data Local station RX and RY only the input data from other stations can be selected Master station RWr The input data are held regardless of RWw and RWr Local station RWw and RWr only the input data from other stations any setting Area for which Clear or Hold can be selected in the data link faulty station input status setting Area where data a
231. itching request is issued from the network module in own system refer to SD1590 221 W JS S Nda uepunp y Puiss 2dy 104 SuOIINeDaiq xipueddy Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses This section describes the buffer memory of the CC Link IE Field Network board Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name O Reference 0 to 18975 0000H to 4A1FH Page 222 Appendix 2 1 19456 to 20463 4COOH to 4FEFH Page 224 Appendix 2 2 20512 to 20536 5020H to 5038H Page 226 Appendix 2 3 20544 to 24383 5040H to 5F3FH Page 227 Appendix 2 4 Append IX 2 1 Link device area The areas to store the values of link devices Address Decimal Hexadecimal Name Reference 0 to 1023 0000H to 03FFH Page 222 1 in this section 1024 to 2047 0400H to O7FFH Page 222 2 in this section 2048 to 10239 0800H to 27FFH Page 223 3 in this section 10240 to 18431 2800H to 47FFH Remote register RWr Page 223 4 in this section 18432 to 18463 4800H to 481FH Link special relay SB Page 223 5 in this section 18464 to 18975 4820H to 4A1FH Link special register SW Page 223 6 in this section 1 Remote input RX Address 0 to 1023 0000H to O03FFH The areas to store the value of RX The RX start number and number of points for each station number can be checked by the RX offset size information gt Page 224 Appendix 2 2 1 Each bit corresponds to 1 bit of RX Buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3
232. k in ring topology using a switching hub If a network is configured in ring topology through the two ports of the switching hub the following problems may arise Therefore do not use a switching hub for ring topology e Loopback cannot be detected if an Ethernet cable is disconnected e If a station is disconnected due to failure or power off data link will stop X Switching hub There is an offline mode station on a network configured in ring topology In the following cases the master station or the station connected to the offline mode station cannot detect loopback e Either of the Ethernet cables connected to the offline mode station is disconnected Master station Station in Offline mode No loopback is No loopback is detected detected w JS S YIOMION UIS zZz e A station connected to the offline mode station is disconnected Master station Station in Offline mode No loopback is No loopback is detected detected To detect loopback set the offline mode station as a reserved station When the offline mode station is disconnected loopback can be detected 29 d Connecting disconnecting a cable and turning off on a device When the following operations are performed all stations on the network may be reconnected Then data link error may momentarily occur in all the stations and outputs of the connected slave stations may turn off Network Configuration Operations e Turning o
233. kback being performed Loopback stations exist Condition e This relay is valid while Loopback function setting status SB0078 is on Stores the linkup status of PORT1 own station OFF Linkup in progress ON Linkdown in progress The time that the linkup starts after power on or Ethernet cable connection O may vary Normally it takes a few seconds Depending on device status on the line a linkup process is repeated resulting in the increase in the time Stores the linkup status of PORT2 own station OFF Linkup in progress ON Linkdown in progress The time that the linkup starts after power on or Ethernet cable connection may vary Normally it takes a few seconds Depending on device status on the line a linkup process is repeated resulting in the increase in the time Stores if an error frame is received at the own station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame is received at the own station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the own station s PORT1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present at the own station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has be
234. ked Check the hardware of the bus I F function of the CC Link IE Field Page 52 Section 4 5 1 Network board Check the memory of the CC Link IE Field Network board Page 53 Section 4 5 2 Check the internal hardware of the CC Link IE Field Network board Page 53 Section 4 5 3 Check the communication circuit of the transmission system of the CC Page 54 Section 4 5 4 Link IE Field Network board Check the network circuit status and parameter setting status of each station Page 59 Section 4 7 1 Check the connection status of the Ethernet cable Page 61 Section 4 7 2 Check whether the communication path for transient transmission from Page 62 Section 4 7 3 the own station to the target station is correct ys uogoun4 p S Reference Page 76 Section 5 4 Page 113 Section 10 2 2 Page 163 Section 13 2 7 them Reserved stations are not detected as faulty stations even though they are not actually connected Reserved station specification can be temporarily canceled without changing the parameters Prevent the master station from detecting a slave station as a faulty Page 84 Section 5 6 Page 113 Section 10 2 2 Page 164 Section 13 2 8 station even if the slave station is disconnected during data link This can be used when replacing a slave station during data link for instance Event conditions are checked every link scan and if the event conditions are met notifies events to the user program Th
235. l User Accounts and Family Safety System Appearance and gt View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Personalization Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Clock Language and Region Windows Update Ease of Access Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Power Options Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 Administrative Tools Free up disk space Defragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions 8 View event logs Schedule tasks 4 Set the slide bar Never notify and click the Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer b utt oO n User Account Control helps prevent potentially harmful programs from making changes to your computer Tell me more about User Account Control settings Always notify ig Never notify me when Programs try to install software or make changes to my computer I make changes to Windows settings Not recommended Choose this only if you need to use programs that are not certified for Windows 7 because they do not support User Account Control 4 Setting completed 2 2 Allow
236. language setting is changed When using Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 or Windows 8 1 NET Framework 3 5 is required Enable the NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 or 3 0 in Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel A network drive cannot be specified as the installation destination When the parameters have been set with the utility installed the parameters are initialized at installation Save the parameters with the save file function before installing the utility When the software package has been installed in the environment that the creation of 8 3 filename is disabled the software package may not be uninstalled Enable the creation of 8 3 filename before installing the software package For the method on how to check and change the status of 8 3 filename creation to enable disable refer to the website of Microsoft Corporation CHAPTER 6 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE PACKAGES 6 2 Installation The following explains a procedure for installing the software package 1 Installation 7 Insert the CD ROM to the CD ROM drive 2 Double click the Setup exe file on the CD ROM 3 By following the on screen instructions select or enter the necessary information When the corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective L Page 174 Section 16 2 3 4 Restart the perdonal computer 2 When installation is completed normally When the installation is comple
237. link error is occurring Page 187 Section 16 6 1 e Check the Windows event viewer C Page 193 Section 16 7 7 e Refer to the CPU module manual regarding the CPU of the station in which a CPU Stop error Continuation error is occurring perform the troubleshooting of the CPU module For link special relays SB refer to lt Page 228 Appendix 3 and for link special registers SW refer to gt Page 240 Appendix 4 16 7 14 Checking communication status with monitoring access target device Monitor the link device and access target device with Device Monitor Utility Page 139 Section 12 2 Check whether the system is performing as set on the parameters and programs by checking the performance of link poyjyew Buloy 2 91 device communication or transient transmission reception Check An error message is displayed Is an unexpected value set to the link device Is the device able to be written with Device Monitor Utility Corrective action e Take corrective action following the message e Check the error code and perform the corrective action described in the error code list 3 Page 203 Section 16 9 e Take corrective action for when an unexpected value is set to the link device 1 gt Page 187 Section 16 6 1 1 e Check the user program when the access can be performed normally with Device Monitor Utility 201 sjajsibes jeioeds yul pue gs sAejau jeioeds yur Buopyuow YM snes
238. logy 148 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS Board Board 1 Network No 2 Change Board Select Station Station No 3 Error ai Co Saree Bes a 2 Slave Stations E Sage ace eae 3 Hide Disconnected Station Legend Data link unperform Station No 2 Stop Monitor 2 Status of a station selected in Network Status is displayed in Selected Station Communication Status Monitor gt Page 155 7 in this section e The station status is displayed on the top of Selected Station Communication Status Monitor e If an error occurs a button indicating the error Such as Module Error button is displayed Clicking the button allows checking of error details and corrective actions Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Q81BD 371GF11 12 CD o ovine MAC Address 1LF E j Click the button to display the Error details screen 3 Various tests and operations can be performed from Operation Test and Information Confirmation Set on the bottom left of the screen Page 158 Section 13 2 3 to Page 164 Section 13 2 8 Operation Test i Communication Test Check the transient communication route from the connected _ station to the destination station Cable Test Check the cable status between the connected station and lt the destination station Link Start Stop Start or stop the network data link Information Confirmation Set f Network Event History Ac
239. lowing shows a main frame configuration Work window gt gt 96 Screen display Title bar gt AARE A essa cee aes Cm E my astra cmt celts Menu bar Rr Project Edit view Online Diagnostics Window Help Toolbar CE sanaa 4 ii Network Parameter CC IE Fi x Oo Board S Boada Boada OE Board 4 Network Type Nore CS ola Channel No ee ee eee Network No Total Stations Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Routing Parameters Check End Cancel Display contents Name Description Reference Title bar Display a project name Menu bar Display menu options for executing each function Toolbar Display tool buttons for executing each function Page 97 Section 8 2 2 A main screen used for operations such as parameter setting Work window Page 99 Section 8 2 3 and monitoring CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8 2 2 Toolbars A toolbar is a block of on screen buttons for executing frequently used functions included in a menu The toolbars to be displayed and their display positions on the screen can be set by the user 1 Displaying hiding toolbars Select a toolbar to be displayed Operating procedure 1 View gt Toolbar gt toolbar name The selected toolbar is displayed on the screen View Online Diagnostics Window Help CC IE Field Utili ty EAs Network Parameter a Standard Board c
240. lty station 0 008 72 Device Monitor Utility 129 PAS a ee wo ee c eee oem eee Eee 65 Driver WDT function 0 0 2 0 000 eee eee 87 rating plate 2 eee 264 Driver WDT Monitoring Time 120 Remote input RX 0 00 eee eee 222 Remote output RY o n annaa 0 2000 eee 222 E Remote register RWr 00 anaana 223 Remote register RWw nananana anaana aaa 223 Error code aonan uuau acea 203 Reserved station 2 eee eee ee 83 Error invalid station 000 cece eeee 84 Ring topology 1 6 6 cece eee eee 26 Ee anc demas dons ncrwume corne oases bes 85 Routing parameters 222 000000 75 122 External Dimensions 00005 282 RWr eee 113 223 RNW sn ae Moreen Sa oh eae oe a 113 223 O EE EEE E eae eee ee 113 222 F RY aaan araara 113 222 Function version 2 0000 eee eee eee 264 S H Screw tightening torque n o naa aa aaan 49 Seral NOs sirarenrin a hod bale aie E 264 Ea aa E a Rie ni E ae 101 133 Slave station 0 000 ee eee eee 21 65 Star top logy 44 6 6 6 eee Saree ec oon o ous Awe 26 L LERR LED 00 cece cece cece eee ees 199 T o ge Oe ee oh Transient transmission 20000 14 ine topology 2 ee ee es 26 Link device a 2684084020 bos oe oaeed an eat 41 IN DOING 1465204 b64b deserts endeesnus ee 40 U Link refresh 2 ee 66 258 Link scan LoLo LLL LLL LL LLL LLL 66 258 COUN 0a E E E
241. m down or system reset occurred when the Personal computer shuts down system Is in operation The system down occurred when deleting or disabling the driver Page 179 Section 16 3 1 There is no icon in the start menu of the operating system Utility does not start up S e Page 180 Section 16 3 2 The utility does not start up by clicking the icon The screen or operation is The utility screen is not displayed normally i ead abs Page 180 Section 16 3 3 abnormal The utility cannot be operated The corrective action displayed on An unexpected screen is displayed e Page 181 Section 16 3 4 the screen is not effective The corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective Mouse or keyboard operates slowly Personal computer operates Other application operates slowly P o e Page 182 Section 16 3 5 slowly CPU utilization of personal computer is high Operation of sound function is unstable 3 Board and driver Error Description Reference A hardware failure or a board WDT error has occurred i e Page 182 Section 16 4 1 RUN LED is OFF An WDT error occurred A driver WDT error occurred RUN LED is flashing and RD LED is ON l The driver cannot communicate with the board Driver does not activate e Page 183 Section 16 4 3 RUN LED is OFF e Page 183 Section 16 4 2 Meus eror occirred PCI bus PCI Express bus error occurred Brine a RUN LED is flashing and SD LE
242. m is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region 1 2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE Interlink transfer and routing functions CC Link IE Field Network board cannot be used as a relay station for the interlink transfer function or the routing function To use these functions set a network module as a relay station Driver installation and updating Do not install or update the driver other than the method written in the troubleshooting Page 169 CHAPTER 16 in this manual The consistency between the driver and utility cannot be ident
243. mber D2A6H Request source number D2A7H to D2A8H Header information D2A9H D2AAu Target station number D2ABu Network number of the request source D2ACH Station number of the request source D2ADH Number of data frame length Target network number The own station received transient data that is addressed to another station on the route Check and correct the network and target station numbers and retry the operation Check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action Transient data transmission addressed to the own station was requested Check the network number and target station number and retry the operation Check if the routing parameters are correctly set and take corrective action Check if the cables and switching hub of the request source are connected properly Exchange the cables between PORT1 and PORT2 of the request source and retry the operation Reduce the frequency of transient transmission and then retry the operation Write the network parameters to the board again If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set the link scan mode to asynchronous or cancel the constant link scan time setting Refer to corrective action for hardware error _ Page 214 1 in this section Correct the link device size of slave station s and retry the operation D611H to D612H RWw
244. mmunication status with monitoring access target device 201 16 8 Information Required for Inquiries 0 0 0 0 cc eee 202 169 Erno Code Lisi nacsketued ctenaieeetead eh dud iEn ee dtesecdeeetnogeteneee ue 203 APPENDIX 215 Appendix 1 Precautions for Accessing Redundant CPU System 0000 000 215 Appendix 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 0 00 ccc ccc cette 222 Appendix 2 1 Link device area eee eee 222 Appendix 2 2 Offset size information o54 0 4544 4544 4 4584426454656 5400 05 0556 04 224 Appendix 2 3 Own station information 2 0 0 0 aaa 226 Appendix 2 4 Other station informations s eae goer fo oe es aod Ce ee oe a 2217 Appendix 3 Link Special Relay SB List n nanana anaana aana 228 Appendix 4 Link Special Register SW List n n naana aannaaien i 240 Appendix 5 Processing Time senca 222 4ced0 i ed s 490 65 ced eee se ooo bbe a bee eee en eeacen 257 Appendix 5 1 IK refresh WING dade oe be ere cee ob a b eee be eee te ea td whe oad 258 Appendix 5 2 Link scan time aana a aa aaa ee ee ee 258 Appendix 5 3 Transmission delay time aaan naaa 259 Appendix 6 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes 000 cee aa 260 Appendix 7 Comparison of CC Link and CC Link IE Field Network 0000005 261 Appendix 8 Combinations with Existing Software 0 0 0 0 00000 eee 263 Appendix 9 Checking Serial Number and Function Version 20 0 0 ce
245. mporary error invalid setting cancel request SBO011 is turned Fr OFF the stored error definition is cleared S N Stores the result when disabling reserved station function 2 0 Normal SW0056 Result of reserved 1 or higher Abnormal lt 3 Page 203 Section 16 9 J station function disable When Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared Stores the result when reserved station function disable is undone 0 Normal SW0057 Result of reserved 1 or higher Abnormal 3 Page 203 Section 16 9 station function enable When Reserved station specification enable request SB0013 is turned OFF the stored error definition is cleared Number of total slave Stores the number of total slave stations that are set by the parameters SW0058 i l O stations setting Range 1 to 120 245 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the number of total slave stations that are actually connected by Number of total slave a SW0059 data link in the CC Link IE Field Network stations current value l Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected O Stores the maximum station number of the stations where the baton pass is performed Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected Maximum baton pass ener station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the maximum sta
246. mputer is started It also occurs when mounting the problem board with another computer Other boards Troubleshooting mounted with the computer works properly result 202 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 6 9 Error Code List The following lists the error codes For error codes which are not listed in this section refer to the following manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual If the error still occurs after the corrective action please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative For information required for inquiries refer to gt Page 202 Section 16 8 Error code ono Fic Corrective action DOOOH to DOOFH e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section DO10H to D013H e Correct the points assigned to the link devices DO14H to DO16H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section DO18H e Correct the constant link scan time DO19H to DO20H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section DO30H to DO35H e Correct the wiring condition DO36H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section DO37H e Check the number of connected modules DO40H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error __ gt Page 214 1 in this section D041H e Check the number of connected modules DO80H to D0
247. must be the same as the station that instructed the link stop Data link start stop instructing e The method of the link start data link start instruction in CC Link IE Field Network station error diagnostics or by using the link special relay SB or link special register SW in the program is different from that of the link stop Instruct the link start by the same method as used for the link stop instruction e Link start has failed in the past Force the system to restart data link Data link start stop instructing e Link start was instructed during execution of data link Instruct link start after station error instruction of link stop History acquisition setting data e The area space for writing history acquisition setting data in Network Event History full is insufficient Reset the CPU module or turn OFF the power and then ON Hardware error e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section History acquisition setting data e The previous history acquisition setting data in Network Event History were not error written successfully Reset the CPU module or turn OFF the power and then ON e The read request in CC Link IE Field Network Diagnostics is incorrect Close the Transient data request error CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics dialog box and request it again e Check the read request data at the request source station and retry the operation e A number of data writes to the fl
248. n also continue data link Ring topology If an error occurs the system will loopback data TELCELELII gt continuing data link CE GE SIE gt coe GRAE y as e 2 gt A gt Cae Line topology 7 J ml Error Stations after the error station are disconnected 1 Setting procedure Configure the network in ring topology and set Use for Loopback Function Setting on the Supplementary Setting screen in Network Configuration Setting gt Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 CC IE Field Supplementary Setting Link Scan Mode Setting l Constant Scan Recseeeees Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected l Select the check box N to each other A Ea Block Data Assurance per Station WV Assure Block Data cm 2 Precautions For network topology other than ring topology clear the check box If the loopback function setting and the network configuration are inconsistent an error may occur in all stations and data link cannot be performed Whether loopback is being performed or not can be checked by link special relay SB and link special register SW for the master station Page 228 Appendix 3 Page 240 Appendix 4 86 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 9 Driver WDT function Driver WDT function monitors the operation of the software operating system driver ins
249. n link with the connected station Target stations of the link start stop operation can be selected in Selected Status Select Link Start Link Stop To forcibly start the data link of a station which has been stopped by another station or a special relay special register check Forced Link Start 2 Click the Execute button The link start stop is executed for all selected stations at once When the process is completed Selected Status are cleared and the contents of Link Status are updated Link Start Stop Executing Contents Screen button P Select All button Selects all stations displayed in the list e Cancel All Selections button Cancels the selection status of all stations selected in the list 160 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 6 Network event history Display a list of event history occurred on the own station and on the network Screen display XW Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen c gt Metwork Event History button Network Event History Network Event History Collection Target Whole Network Network No 1 Network Event History List Detailed Information 2011 01 07 14 57 30 Master Station lt lt Own St gt gt Error Error code of the own station Error code DOAS 2011 01 07 14 56 11 2011 01 07 14 56 11 2011 01 07 14 56 11 2011 01 07 14 56 00 2011 01 07 14 56 00 2011 01 07 14 56 00 2011 01 07 14 55
250. nabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF D l Stores if there are any reserved stations OFF No reserved stations ON Reserved stations found If a reserved station is found the status of each station can be checked by Reserved station specification SW00C0 to SW00C7 O Depending on the timing of the link refresh Reserved station specification SW00C0 to SW00C7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if there are any error invalid stations OFF No error invalid stations ON Error invalid station found If an error invalid station is found the status of each station can be checked by Error invalid station setting SWOODO to SW00D7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh Error invalid station setting SWOODO to SW00D7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if there are any temporary error invalid stations OFF No temporary error invalid stations ON Temporary error invalid station found If a temporary error invalid station is found the status of each station can be checked by Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SWO0E7 Depending on the timing of the link refresh Temporary error invalid station setting SWOOEO to SW00E7 and the update may be offset by one se
251. ndby hibernate e Windows XP e Windows Server 2003 R2 2 Behavior when entering the standby mode hibernation mode When the personal computer enters the power save mode standby hibernate the following message appears and the power save mode standby hibernate is disabled The CC Link IE Field Network board continues its operation and the data link remains normal lt When entering the standby mode gt System Standby Failed T The device driver For the MELSEC CC Link IE Field Controller device is preventing the machine From entering standby Please close all applications and try again IF the problem persists you may need to update this driver lt When entering the hibernation mode gt System Hibernation Failed The device driver For the MELSEC CC Link IE Field Controller device is preventing the machine From entering hibernation Please close all applications and try again IF the problem persists you may need to update this driver 3 Corrective action When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode standby hibernate check and change the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed or the settings of the uninterruptible power supply system UPS on the control panel 272 APPENDIX Appendix 12 2 Behavior when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the power save mode hiberna
252. net cable Page 61 Section 4 7 2 Network a Check whether the communication path for transient transmission Communication test o Page 62 Section 4 7 3 diagnostics from the own station to the target station is correct The history of events that occurred in the own station and on the network is displayed For the master station the event history of the Page 161 Section entire network can be displayed and so it can be used for 13 2 6 troubleshooting at network start up Transient Seamless transmission E aie He Page 75 Section 5 3 2 transmission with different networks Network event history Page 83 Section 5 5 Page 163 Section 13 2 7 Reserved station Reserved stations can be temporarily disabled without changing temporary disablement parameters Other b Modified functions The following are the functions modified in the CC Link IE Field Network board Function Notes during replacement When the CC Link IE Field Network is connected in a line topology stations after the disconnected station become data link error stations To prevent disconnection of normal stations connect the CC Link IE Field Network in a star topology Page 26 Section 2 2 Slave station cut off function Standby master function No standby master function is available in the CC Link IE Field Network board Data link status setting for error occurrence of CC Link module master The setting is fixed to Continue for CC Link IE Fiel
253. ng Event Setting Event Setting Driver Setting Target Setting Target Setting cessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Network setting Network Type Select the network type _ Page 112 Section 10 2 1 Channel No Select the channel number Set the network number Network No Setting range 1 to 239 Set the total number of stations Total Stations Setting range 1 to 120 Set the station number of the board Station No Setting range Fixed to 0 for a master station 1 to 120 for a local station JOJOWCICd YIOMISN Bulas COL Mode Select the mode Page 112 Section 10 2 1 Network Configuration Setting Display the Network Configuration Setting screen Page 113 Section 10 2 2 Network Operation Setting Display the Network Operation Setting screen 7 Page 117 Section 10 2 3 Event Setting Display the Event Setting screen lt Page 118 Section 10 2 4 Driver Setting Display the Driver Setting screen _ gt Page 120 Section 10 2 5 Target Setting Display the Target Setting screen _ gt Page 121 Section 10 2 6 2 Clickthe amp d _ button Screen button e Routing Parameters button Displays the CC IE Field Routing Information Setting screen gt Page 122 Section 10 2 7 Check button Checks whether the settings are
254. ng bit devices ON and OFF 00 0c cece 12 7 Switching Display Format aana aaa aaa otate obs cues ies 12 8 Using Numerical Pad 5 2 i verdet aaaea CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 1 Diagnosing Board nasau aeaaee 13 2 Diagnosing CC Link IE Field Network 000055 13 2 1 Selecting the diagnostics target 0 00 0 13 2 2 Displaying diagnostics Screen 0 0 et ent n ee nes 147 1329 Communica leS puncdsasw art onawn ch fused s eee AS nae ee EAE Eanes eh aS aaa i 158 DA Cablettest acace baw aries Paar ee PA he OA wk Pe NE Pe AA oa Adie Rad a 159 B25 TU SEAN SOD caress te conceal ke cence tcc Dees opened et a a a GRE rd hayes Geese 160 13 2 6 Network event history 22 ben icv ide conan e cued hid nes dee genes ceeeed oak ebewee es 161 13 2 7 Reserved station function enable 2 0 eee eee nee 163 13 2 8 Enable Disable ignore station errors 0 eee een 164 CHAPTER 14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY 166 CHAPTER 15 PROGRAMMING 168 15 1 Precautions on ProogrMamimninGin iavisccecaiae tiarinense oes ob eey vases ids st caved st 168 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 169 16 4 EmOr Examples sii425055 0u5eeer cose st cunonse ster st dues ceeetesatuwenteces 170 16 2 Troubleshooting for Installation Uninstallation 0 0 0 00 00 172 16 21 Installation failed 40048 neeedepxe ba ee dine ay ne en ieee ee Ree eee ee 172 16 2 2 Uninstallation failed 0 0 0 eet enn een ees 172 16 2 3 Action dis
255. ng boards such as CC Link IE Controller Network board CC Link Ver 2 board MELSECNET H board can be utilized for CC Link IE Field Network board Program creation time can be shortened since the users who previously used the existing boards do not need to create a new user program User programs created using the existing boards can be utilized main mdOpen 181 1 amp path mdSend path 255 mdClose path CC Link Ver 2 board etc CC Link IE Field Network board 4 Checking CC Link IE Field Network status on the screen The status of CC Link IE Field Network can be checked using CC IE Field Utility Error locations error causes and event history are displayed on the screen This helps to reduce the time for the system to recover from the error gt Page 143 CHAPTER 13 CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination Monitor Status q Board Board 1 Network No 1 Change Board Select Station Station No 3 Error X a Monitoring y z Stop Monitor Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station iai D IS p ay e rro r Set In Parameter E Connected E Scan Time 1 mS Errors Detected La _Hide Disconnected Station __ legend Connected St locations St No 2 Intelligent Local 3 AR Operation Test p Communication Test Check the transient communication route From the connected
256. nge your Windows password and Internet n rai Windows CardSpace re and Sound Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services Programs Mobile PC User Accounts _ 4 Select Turn User Account Control on or off Scorch Make changes to your user account Change your password Remove your password Change your picture Change your account name Change your account type Manage another account Turn User Account Control on or off F 5 Clear Use User Account Control UAC to help g Ee Accounts gt Turn liber Accound Control On or Off v sep CC Turn on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure protect you r com pute r and cl ick the ok button User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that you leave UAC turned on to help protect your computer F Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer ox cancel aBbessayy Buluse sMOpulIM LL xipueddy 4 Setting completed ess w Bulusem BulusAdid 104 SPOyYZ N Z XIpuaddy 267 b Using Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 1 Open Control Panel Getting Started Connect to a Projector Documents Pic Q Snipping Tool A XPS Viewer N Windows Fax and Scan mputer ntrol P Devices and Prin
257. nitor Utility Menu Reference Batch monitor Batch monitor one type of devices Page 134 Section 12 3 1 16 point register monitor Monitor multiple devices simultaneously in units of 16 points Page 135 Section 12 3 2 Exit Exit Device Monitor Utility Page 131 Section 12 2 1 Setting Reference Network setting Set a programmable controller CPU or board to be monitored Page 136 Section 12 4 Device setting Set devices to be monitored Page 137 Section 12 5 Device Write Reference Data changing Change the word device double word device value Change the sequenced word devices double word devices to the Page 138 Section 12 6 1 Continuous change in data same value Bit device setting Turn ON the specified bit devices Page 139 Section 12 6 2 Bit device resetting Turn OFF the specified bit devices Data Format Reference Word device Display format Change the display format of word devices Double Word device Display format Change the display format of double word devices Bit device Display format Change the display format of bit devices Page 141 Section 12 7 Options Reference Numerical Pad Enable disable the setting to use the numerical pad Page 142 Section 12 8 Help Reference Help Display Help l Page 133 Section 12 2 3 Version Display product information such as a product version CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations of Device Monitor Utility This section
258. nly for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOAO to SW00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored 255 Number SW0180 io Reserved station function disable status SW0187 256 Description Stores the station that is currently in reserved station function disable status 0 No reserved station function disable is specified 1 Reserved station function disable in progress b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO sworso 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1_ swo18i 32 31 30 26 28 27 26 2528 20 22 2r 20 18 1617 SW0182 33 Swo183 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 onoono x4 7a ra 7470 e0 es an Sw0185 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 A oal CECCO sw0187 120 119 118 117 116 11 Each number in the table represents a station O jo A Ni oe oa o Z oO O is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SW00A0 to SW00A7 e Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored Availability Master station Local station APPENDIX Appendix 5 Processing Time The processin
259. ns on which the user program is displayed check the user program If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 202 Section 16 8 181 9AI NOJJO JOU SI UBSJOS y UO p ejds p Uone ADON YEL Aun pue saindwoy jeuosjeg Jo Buljooussjqnos 94 16 3 5 Personal computer operates slowly The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and operating speed of the personal computer became slow e Response of mouse or keyboard is slow e Operating speed of another application is slow e CPU utilization of personal computer is high e Operation of sound function is unstable When the operating speed of the personal computer becomes slow check the following items Item Corrective action e Start the Windows task manager and specify the application with high Is the CPU utilization of other application high CPU utilization in the lt lt Processes gt gt or lt lt Performance gt gt tab e Reduce the execution frequency of the application with high CPU utilization e Adjust the value of link refresh cycle setting Page 120 Section 10 2 5 e Set the constant link scan Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 Is the cyclic transmission operation time longer a ae e Adjust the number of transient transmissions Is the transient transmission operation time ae e Reconsider Event Condition of the event function longer i Page 118 Section 10 2 4 Replace th
260. nt button Assigns the same link device points to all local stations Enter the points in the field next to the Identical Point Assignment button Clear button Clears all settings Check button Checks whether the settings are correct 114 CHAPTER 10 SETTING PARAMETERS 1 Supplementary setting Set the link scan mode loopback function and block data assurance per station Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen gt Network Configuration Setting gt Network Configuration Setting screen gt button ms Loopback Function Setting Use Please build network configuration ring configuration that the end stations of Line Connection are connected to each other Block Data Assurance per Station JV Assure Block Data cms Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Link scan is executed asynchronously with the link refresh which is executed by the CC Link IE Field Network board driver Check the check box and set the constant link scan time Constant Link Scan Setting range 1 to 200 Loopback Function Setting Link Scan Mode Setting Select whether to use the loopback function Use L gt Page 86 Section 5 8 To configure a network in ring topology select this check box Block Data Assurance per Select whether to assure data integrity on a station basis in link
261. number are ignored Stores if an error frame is received on the transmission path at each station s PORT 1 0 A line error has not yet occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT 1 1 A line error has occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT1 When Clear communication error count SBOOO6 is turned ON the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 bO swor2o 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Sw0120 PORT1 error frame ain to reception status eves O SW0127 each station Syne 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swo124 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 74 70 69 68 67 66 65 Sw0125 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 Sw0126 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 swot27 aot 19 1 19 t17fr tf 15 1 14 1413 Each number in the table represents a station No SI7 MS Ja sI6ey Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOAO to SW00A7 253 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores if an error frame is received on the transmissi
262. o 20536 5037H to 5038H 20537 to 20538 5039H to 503AH 42 RWw offset size information System area RWr offset size information System area Station No 1 RWw offset Station No 1 RWw size O Station No 120 RWw offset Station No 120 RWw size Station No 1 RWr offset Station No 1 RWr size O Station No 120 RWr offset Station No 120 RWr size Initial value Read write Read Read Own station network card information System area Own station controller information System area Manufacturer code Model type Model code Version Controller information valid invalid flag Manufacturer code Model type Model code Version Model name string Vendor specific device information pe oe Read Read write Refer to Page 225 Appendix 2 2 3 Page 225 Appendix 2 2 4 Page 226 Appendix 2 3 Page 226 Appendix 2 3 Address ve Initial l Decimal Read write l value Hexadecimal 20544 Manufacturer code 50401 ale Model type 5041H ai Read 20546 Other station station No 1 Model code 5042H network card information 20547 Versi ersion 5043H 20548 to 20551 System area 5044H to 5047H 20552 Controller information valid 5048H invalid flag 20553 Manufacturer code 5049H TN Model type 504An uF a Model code Read ea 504BH Other station station No 1 20556 controller information Version 504CH
263. o the default when Reset Toolbar is selected Save Reset Toolbar CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8 2 3 Work windows A work window is a main screen used for operations such as parameter setting and monitoring in CC IE Field Utility Screen display Tab Tool hint Scroll button e fl Network Parameter CC IE Fi X JE Network Parameter CC IE Field Net k Network Parameter CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting Work window switching button por Board Bard Board 4 Network Type CC IE Field Master Station w Channel No Network No Online WormalMode pI Network Configuration Setting en None Total Stations i etl Network Operation Setting E Driver Setting Pp Oooo Taret Setting Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Routing Parameters Check End Cancel Display contents SMOPUIM JOM Z S suo eJado oiseg pue uolneinByuo0y uses9S Z g Item Description Become active when selected The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping tabs The window s can be closed from the menu displayed by right clicking the tab In the other way the active window can be closed by clicking gt lt on the tab Tab Close Active Window Close Right Windows Close Left Windows Close Inactive Windows Close All Tool hint Display a brief explanation when the cursor is moved ont
264. o the selected tab Scroll the tab display to the left and right Scroll button Display hidden tabs Display a list of windows being displayed Work window switching button Select a data name displayed on the list to display its corresponding window on the top Display screens such as the Network Parameter Setting the Number of CC IE Display windows Field Cards screen 99 1 Arranging displaying windows This function displays a list of open windows and also opens and arranges specified windows This function is useful to display the desired window efficiently when multiple windows are open Display contents T Window gt Window Window Select Window bw iNetwork Parameter CC IE Field Network Configuration lt iNetwork Parameter CC IE Field Number of Boards Setti Close Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile vertically Minimize eT 100 CHAPTER 8 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 8 3 Help Function 1 Displaying manuals Display the manual of the CC Link IE Field Network board Operating procedure 1 Z Help gt Manual 2 Checking version of CC IE Field Utility Display information such as the software version of CC IE Field Utility Operating procedure 1 Z Help gt About Sw 1DMC CCIEF B 1 004 CC IE Field Utility 2010 12 27 Copyright 2 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved uoljoun 4 djaH g 101 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT
265. oard Abbreviation for the watchdog timer that monitors the communication status between a network board and a personal computer or operating status of a personal computer 19 PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Before Using the Product Q80BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board SW1DNC CCIEF B CC Link IE Field Network software package CD ROM Software license agreement Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Before Using the Product Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Interface Board SW1DNC CCIEF B CC Link IE Field Network software package CD ROM Low Profile Bracket Software license agreement 20 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 overview 1 1 CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Field Network is a high speed and large capacity open field network that is based on Ethernet technology 1000BASE T 1 Data communication High speed and large capacity data communication is available between a master station and slave stations on the CC Link IE Field Network a Periodic communication cyclic transmission Data is periodically communicated among stations within the same network gt Page 66 Section 5 2 Master local module Ce AIOMION PlP 4 Al AUIT OO pL b Non periodic communication transient transmission Data i
266. ogy and data link will start When using the loopback function Enable the loopback function and rewrite the network parameter to the board L gt Page 86 Section 5 8 When a master local module is used for the master station check if the master local module supports the loopback function If the master local module does not support the loopback function replace the module with the one which supports the loopback function lt The system contains a switching hub gt is displayed by any of the following causes Although the loopback function is disabled the network is configured in ring topology Although the loopback function is enabled the network is configured in star topology The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology Perform the following measures Check if the loopback function setting is correctly configured gt Page 86 Section 5 8 If incorrect correct the network parameter and rewrite it to the board When data link starts over the network the action is successful When the loopback function is disabled perform the following measures Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power cycle the hub Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network When data link starts over the network check the network configuration by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics When the loopback function is enabled perform the following measures Configure the netwo
267. olely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by in
268. ollowing is a calculation formula for the link refresh time when the link scan mode is asynchronous LS Item Ka Kb Ke Maximum transient processing time Kd Maximum data link processing time when disconnecting from network or reconnecting to network 258 RX points RY points 8 RWr points RWw points x2 x 0 08 Number of connected slave stations x Ka Kb Kc Kd 1000 Number of event conditions in Event Setting x 0 02 ms Cyclic transmission mode Normal mode 25 8 655 160 60 x Total number of slave stations set in the parameters High speed mode Conditions Value When Turn OFF or 0 Clear Input Data RX RY is set in the 18 5 Network Operation Setting When Hold input Data RX RY is set in the Network Operation 9 75 Setting 168 80 e When the serial number first five digits of the master station is 17022 or higher Number of disconnected stations x 3500 e When the serial number first five digits of the master station is 17021 or lower 9000 Total number of ports used in the switching hub x 3000 9000 when the switching hub is not used APPENDIX Appendix 5 3 Transmission delay time The following are the calculation formulas for the transmission delay time 1 Master station RX lt Slave station input The following table shows the time after a signal is input to the slave station until the board device of the master station turn
269. ommon Project Edit View Online Diagnostics Window Help 2 Docking floating toolbars Switch the display format docking floating of a toolbar a Floating a toolbar Display a toolbar floating from the main frame Operating procedure 1 Drag a docked toolbar to the desired position for floating display a CC IE Field Utility Project Edit View Online Diagnostics CC IE Field Utility Project Edit view Online Diagnostics ut sjeqjool cc 8 suonesado siseg pue uoNesnBiyuoD uas Zg Drag and drop b Docking Display a toolbar docked to the main frame Operating procedure 1 Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and drop it in the main frame CC IE Field Utility CC IE Field Utility Project Edit View Online Diagnostics Project Edit View Online Diagnostics Drag and drop Point Method for docking a toolbar at the original position To dock a floating toolbar back at the original position double click on the title bar of the toolbar 97 98 3 Customizing toolbars This function sets the types of tool buttons to be displayed in each toolbar Operating procedure 1 X Toolbar options button E c gt Add or Remove Buttons A list of tool buttons is displayed Reset Toolbar Check the check box in front of the tool button to be displayed on the screen The checked tool buttons are displayed on the screen gt DA The toolbar configuration returns t
270. ommunication to another network A communication function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network by using link devices RX RY RWw and RWr A method for communication with another station which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or utility Generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission Process of selecting paths for communication with other networks For CC Link IE Field Network to communicate with stations on a different kind of network configure communication paths with routing parameters in advance Instruction that facilitates programming for the functions of the intelligent function modules Operation that is performed to restart data link when a faulty station returns to normal Operation that is performed to stop data link when a data link error occurs Term Loopback Device Link device Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Link special relay SB Link special register SW Link scan time Link refresh Baton pass Buffer memory RAS MD function Board WDT Driver WDT Description Function that disconnects the station in which an error has occurred from the network and continues data link with the stations that are operating normally Stations connected after the faulty station can also continue data link One of various devices X Y M D etc inside a CPU module One of various devices
271. on Does the same error occur when adding the station to the l Se If the same error occurred check the added station l e Checking installation environment K Page 190 Section 16 7 1 e Checking cables and wiring Page 190 Section 16 7 3 e Board test L Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 202 Section 16 8 16 5 4 Station is disconnected The following explains the troubleshooting when the following symptoms occurred and the station is disconnected e A station which has been communicating normally is suddenly disconnected e Data cannot be read to write from the accessed station e Communication with accessed station occasionally fails e A relevant station repeats network connection and disconnection When the station is disconnected check the following items Item Corrective action Is there any ambient temperature or noise influence Check the installation environment Page 190 Section 16 7 1 Is there an error on the cable or hub Check the cable and wire gt Page 190 Section 16 7 3 Is the wiring properly If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L gt Page 202 Section 16 8 185 NddOO Uey 194 O S INDOW Nd 0 pesssa50e q JOUUPD wesbod J SN ZOL yur eyeq 104 Bunooys jqnos S 9 16 5 5 Communication is unstable When the link scan time and transmission delay time is abnormally longer or a timeout occurs during transient
272. on 16 6 2 s jdwex 4 101313 OL 171 16 2 Troubleshooting for Installation Uninstallation The following explains the troubleshooting for error at installation or uninstallation e Installation failed 1 gt Page 172 Section 16 2 1 e Uninstallation failed i Page 172 Section 16 2 2 16 2 1 Installation failed When the installation is aborted or failed reinstall the utility by the following procedure 1 Check the installation uninstallation precautions Page 88 Section 6 1 2 Restart the personal computer 3 Ifthe utility can be uninstalled uninstall it Page 91 Section 6 3 After the uninstallation restart the personal computer 4 Install the utility again by following the installation procedure When the screen whosemeasurement is not sure is displyed L Page 174 Section 16 2 3 Page 181 Section 16 3 4 5 Ifthe personal computer does not operate normally after the reinstallaion check if the personal computer has any problems e Operating Environment K Page 191 Section 16 7 4 e Checking personal computer and operating system Page 191 Section 16 7 5 If any of the above troubleshooting do not solve the error refer to L Page 202 Section 16 8 16 2 2 Uninstallation failed When the uninstallation is failed uninstall the utility after the reinstallation by the following procedure 1 Check the installation uninstallation precautions Page 88 Section 6 1 If the creation of 8 3
273. on of the cable test retry it e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section e When using the CCPASET instruction check the intelligent function module switch settings and write the setting data to the CPU module e When not using the CCPASET instruction clear the intelligent function module switch settings and write the setting data to the CPU module e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section e The flash ROM may be faulty e Refer to corrective action for hardware error Page 214 1 in this section e Refer to corrective action for hardware error gt Page 214 1 in this section 213 Error code Corrective action DAF8u to e The flash ROM may be failed Perform hardware and self loopback tests Flash ROM failure DAF9H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error lt _ gt Page 214 1 in this section 1 Corrective action for hardware error e A malfunction may have occurred due to noise e Check the wire and cable lengths and grounding condition of each device and take measures against noise C gt Page 44 CHAPTER 4 e Hardware may be faulty e Test the board alone 214 gt Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 APPENDIX APPENDIX Appendix 1 Precautions
274. on path at each station s PORT2 0 A line error has not yet occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT2 1 A line error has occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORTZ When Clear communication error count SBOO06 is turned ON the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 sworso 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 5 lsa s1217 SW0130 PORT2 error frame eles to reception status pune O SW0137 each station swo133 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 67 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 swo13also o ze 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 Sw0136 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 SW0136 swo137 jraojrt9ftag 117 116 Each number in the table represent O o Mm 4 Ni oe oa o is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO0A Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present on the transmission path at each station s PORT1 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT1 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT1 When Clear communication error count SBO006 is turned ON the stored s
275. on which is located beyond the CC Link IE Field Network board from the point of the master station If multiple boards are installed in a single personal computer this symptom occurs for the same number of times as the number of installed boards For a measure to above error set the Network Operation Setting to maintain inputs from data link error station when outputs need to be maintained at an occurrence of a data link error _ 7 Page 117 Section 10 2 3 30 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION e Connected station numbers Connected station numbers should not be duplicated Data link may be stopped when the station number is x Duplication x Station No 0 Station No 1 Station No 1 duplicated Data link may stop f Turn on order To avoid incorrect input from slave stations turn on slave stations first and then the master station WaISAS YIOMION B HulS zZ 31 2 3 Multi Network System The multi network system is a system in which multiple networks are connected by some relay stations Up to 239 networks can be connected CC Link IE Controller Network Network No 3 le Relay station Relay station Network No 1 gt C Network No 2 CC Link IE CC Link IE Field Network Field Network Point Cyclic transmission is available only in the same network Transient transmission is available with other networks as well as the same network Communications can be made
276. ons Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps ta Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup BitLocker Drive Encryption Protect your computer by encrypting data on your disk Manage BitLocker Administrative Tools ree up disk space efragment your hard drive 8 Create and format hard disk partitions View event logs Schedule tasks xan tS 3 Double click Services Organize v Burn os Name Date modified Type BE Desktop gt Component Services 7 13 2009 9 57 PM Shortcut IB Downloads Computer Management 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut SB Recent Places Data Sources ODBC 7 13 2009 9 53 PM Shortcut fa Event Viewer 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut G Libraries Gs iSCSI Initiator 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut E Documents h Local Security Policy 11 18 2011 2 30PM Shortcut a Music Performance Monitor 7 13 2009 9 53 PM Shortcut E Pictures fap Print Management 11 18 2011 2 30PM Shortcut f Videos 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut a 7 13 20099 53PM_ Shortcut jE Computer Task Scheduler 7 13 2009 9 54 PM Shortcut amp 7 x64 en C rid Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 7 13 20099 54PM Shortcut a 2003 x64 jp D fg Windows Memory Diagnostic 7 13 2009 9 53 PM Shortcut amp Data Disk E E Windows PowerShell Modules 7 13 2009 10 32 PM Shortcut a 2008 x64 en F x 2008R2 x64 jp G Gi
277. ons connected slave stations Consistency check for the station type of slave stations set in master stations and actual Station type check connected station type Detect if loopback is being performed while Use is set for Loopback Function Setting Loopback check in the Network Parameter screen for the master station 1 Executing loop tests The following explains a procedure for loop test assuming the executing station master station is the CC Link IE Field Network board and the target station local station as the CC Link IE Field Network module Point The loop test can be executed only when the CC Link IE Field Network board is the master station When it is the local station execute the test from the master station in the network system to which the local station is connected a Preparing loop tests Prepare the following before loop test 1 Check for the power discontinuity Turn OFF the personal computer Turn OFF the module 2 Cable connection Connect Ethernet cables to each station 3 Turn ON Turn ON the personal computer Turn ON the module 59 s9 doo7 2 7 Buin Joy SIS L Z p b Executing loop tests The executing station master station performs a loop test 1 Select a board to be tested on the Board ChannelNo fist Diagnostics screen in CC IE Field Utility L gt Page 143 Section 13 1 2 Set Mode to Loop Test and click the Start Test button lt Normal
278. opology system stations after the station where the error occurred are disconnected When a station disconnected from a network due to a data link error recovers from the error the station is automatically reconnected to the network and restarts data link This function disconnects only faulty stations and continues data link with only normal stations Page 86 Section 5 8 It also continues data link with normal stations connected after the faulty station which is disconnected in a line topology 4 Diagnostic function Function CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics Bus I F test Individual board Memory test diagnostics Hardware test Self loopback test Loop test Cable test Own network diagnostics Other network Communication diagnostics test 5 Other functions The reserved stations are included in the number of stations that will be connected to the network in the future without actually connecting Function Reserved station specification Reserved station function disable Error invalid station and temporary error invalid station setting Event notification to program Driver WDT function Parameter setting function for CC Link IE Field Network remote device station Reference The status of the CC Link IE Field Network can be checked by CC IE Page 145 Section 13 2 Field Utility The faulty area cause of the fault and its corrective action and event history can be chec
279. or monitoring The following sections 1 2 and 3 show the menus that can be selected with the Batch monitor and 16 point register monitor functions Operating procedure 1 Data Format gt Word device Double Word device Bit device lt gt display format 1 Word devices Display format Batch monitor 16 point register monitor DEC decimal signed 16 bits O DEC decimal unsigned 16 bits HEX hexadecimal 16 bits OCT octal 16 bits BIN binary 16 bits DEC decimal signed 32 bits DEC decimal unsigned 32 bits HEX hexadecimal 32 bits OCT octal 32 bits BIN binary 32 bits O O O OOG O O O Can be displayed Cannot be displayed 2 Double word devices Display format Batch monitor 16 point register monitor DEC decimal signed 32 bits O DEC decimal unsigned 32 bits yewo Aejdsiq Bulysyims ZZL HEX hexadecimal 32 bits OCT octal 32 bits BIN binary 32 bits O OLO O Can be displayed Cannot be displayed 3 Bit devices Display format Batch monitor 16 point register monitor Vertical Indication Horizontal Indication F 0 decimal Horizontal Indication F 0 hexadecimal Horizontal Indication 0 F decimal Horizontal Indication 0 F hexadecimal O Can be displayed Cannot be displayed 141 12 8 Using Numerical Pad This section explains the option function for entering numerals A numerical
280. ored by users SWO0000 to SWO001F e Range where data are stored by the system SW0020 to SWO1FF 3 Link Special Register SW List A list of link special registers SW when they are assigned from SW0000 to SWO1FF is described on the following pages Point e Do not write any data to an area whose number is not on the link special register SW list Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Sets the station where cyclic transmission is stopped or started OOH Own station 01H All stations 02H Specified station SW0000 80H Own station Forced link start 81H All stations Forced link start 82H Specified station Forced link start Stopping starting of cyclic transmission is performed by System link start SBO002 or System link stop SBO003 When setting 02H or 82H by the Link stop start direction SW0000 this sets the station number that stops or starts cyclic transmission Link stop start direction 0 No direction issued for stop or start 1 Direction issued for stop or start b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 swooor 16 15 14 13 12 11 o ele 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 a swo00s swoo0s 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 swoo06 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 e swoo04 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
281. ork board and connected device until it clicks Pay attention to the connector s direction Turn on the personal computer Turn on the connected device Check whether the LINK LED of the port connected with an Ethernet cable is on The time between the power on and the LINK LED turning on may vary The LINK LED usually turns on in a few seconds Note however that the time may be extended further if the linkup process is repeated depending on the status of the device on the line If the LINK LED does not turn on refer to the troubleshooting section and take a corrective action gt Page 169 CHAPTER 16 When only one connector is used in star topology either one of the PORT1 and PORT2 can be used Either one can be used When using two connectors for line topology and ring topology an Ethernet cable can be connected to the connectors in any combination For example the cable can be connected between PORT 1s and between PORT1 and PORT2 Connection between PORT 1s or PORT2s Ht L LER LER P4 Ii ral LINK LINK P LER LER P2 e LINK LINK P2 L Li 14 1 ER QJ71GF11 T2 QJ71GF11 T2 iNK Connection between PORT1 and PORT2
282. osed from Select Station or Network Status Page 150 1 in this section Page 152 5 in this section e Aor is displayed on the module icon of the station where an error occurs e The module of the disconnected station whose data link is once established is displayed in black and white EE The icon of the disconnected station whose data link have never been established though the station is set in Network Configuration Setting is displayed on Disconnected station status monitor located at the right of the screen However if the data link is once established the following disconnected station is displayed on Disconnected station status monitor e A station that was reconnected to a network after cable disconnection insertion or power off and power on of the system and remains disconnected e Data link unexecuted stationsA disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map display area by clicking the Hide Disconnected Station button e is displayed on the icon of a cable where a communication error occurs To check the details of the communication error click the neighboring stations of e is displayed if the network is configured in ring topology although the loopback function is disabled e is displayed if the network is configured in star topology although the loopback function is enabled e is displayed if the network is incorrectly configured in ring topo
283. ot occur An error occurred when Registry e Increase the system memory and disk capacity Database wrote out e When the error has occurred at updating Windows 8 1 or upgrading the operating system with the software package installed reinstall the software package Own station received the request which Check the board which is commanding a process and check the program in the was not processable from another j programmable controller CPU station Failed to allocate the Memory Area Expand the memory in the personal computer The parameter is not set to the board Otherwise the parameter set to the Set parameters in the utility and reset the board board is broken Refer to the corrective action when the driver WDT error occurred Driver WDT error had occurred Page 183 Section 16 4 2 193 J M IA JUSAB YIM suogeJsado BulyoeUuyD 7 79 poujyew Buloy 2 91 The Board WDT error had occurred 295 01274 296 0128H 304 01301 305 0131H 306 0132H 539 021BH 540 021CH 541 021DH 542 021EH 543 021FH Board error was detected by the hardware self diagnosis Entering sleep mode or hibernation mode or fast startup is detected The board is not operated normally because the sleep mode hibernation mode and fast startup is not supported by the board Detect surprise removal Please make sure of the installation of the interface board and the
284. ource Engine Manual Local System i Offline Files The Offline Automatic Local System amp Parental Controls This service Manual Local Service gj Setting completion Point e When MELSECPowerManager is disabled the personal computer may enter the power save mode hibernate sleep automatically depending on the settings on the personal computer Do not disable MELSECPowerManager because the CC Link IE Field Network board does not function normally if the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep For the behavior of the board when the personal computer enters the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function is enabled refer to the following appendix gt Page 272 Appendix 12 e If MELSECPowerManager is disabled accidentally right click MELSECPowerManager on the Services Local screen and select Start from the menu File Action View Help es FlGacS bml gt aun A MELSECPowerManager Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As amp Media Center Extender S Allows Med Disabled Local Service 3 MELSECPowerManager Automatic Local System Microsoft NET Framew Disabled Local System amp Microsoft NET Framew Disabled Local System amp Microsoft NET Framew Automatic D Local System amp Microsoft NET Framew Automatic D Local System Microsoft iSCSI Initiator Manual Local System X Microsoft Softwa
285. out setting When the reception buffer is not set the operation is the same as the RECV function of link dedicated instruction for CPU This setting is used for detecting errors in sent data whose execution type of the SEND function is set to with arrival confirmation at sending side e With setting When the reception buffer is set the operation is the same as the RECV function for MELSECNET H board or CC Link IE Controller Network board This setting is used for receiving data from multiple stations such as data sampling Send source Own station CPU module Target station Driver User application main mdOpen 181 1 amp path L Channel 1 x Channel 1 SEND Sonne mdReceiveEx path 0 255 Channel 2 Channel 2 r ae rey l I mdClose path 1 Messages received from other stations are stored to a storage channel of the target station specified in the send source 2 A driver executes the RECV function automatically and received data are stored to reception buffers of each channel number in the driver A maximum of 128 reception data are stored to each reception buffer of each channel number in the driver When received data exceeds 128 the driver discards the received data automatically 3 Using the mdReceiveEx mdReceive function data of the specified channel number are read from the reception buffer in the order they were received CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS When the reception buffer i
286. ow is displayed before starting diagnostics Select a board to be diagnosed and click the OF button CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics Destination x Board Selection Board 1 Channel No 181 Network No 1 Master Station Station No Ol Board 2 Channel No 182 Network No 1 Local Station Station No 1 Cancel 2 Changing diagnostics target board To change a board to be diagnosed during the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics click the _ change Board button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen The Board Change screen is displayed Select a board to be diagnosed and click the OF button Change Board Board Selection Board 1 Channel No 181 Network No 1 Master Station Station No 0 Board 2 Channel No 182 Network No 1 Local Station Station No 1 Cancel 146 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 2 Displaying diagnostics screen The following explains the diagnostics screen of CC Link IE Field Network Display contents Diagnostics gt gt CC IE Field Diagnostics Select Diagnostics CCIE Field Diagnostics inati ination E Monitor Status Monitor Status Desti nation Board Board 1 Network No 2 Change Board Select station Station No 3 Error x sii N etwo rk Statu S Network Status Total Slave Stations Total Slave Stations Current Link Number of Station Sar z 7 Set In Parameter 2 Connected A Scan Time 1 ms Errors Detecte
287. p Set In Parameter Connected Scan Time Errors Debected Display contents Total Slave Stations Display the total number of slave stations the link scan time in units of ms and the Current Link Scan Time number of stations error occurrences on the network being displayed The Number of Stations Error Occurs 4 Legends Screen button Legends button Displays the explanation for icons displayed on the diagnostics screen mStation Type E Master Local Sub master Station Master Local Sub master Station Hi Q series iQ R series B series Intelligent Device Station Intelligent Device Station eee Board et Remote Device Station Intelligent Device Station CC Link bridge module Other Modules Background Color For Station Type Reserved Station Yellow Errors Temporarily Being Ignored Grange Reserved Station Disabled Activated Grey Errors Always Ignored Sub Master Station for Master Station is running Station Status Error Data link stopped E By Disconnected Station A Eror Minor Ja Selected Station AY Error Moderate Module Error Error Major Display an error icon at the right of station icon PLC Error e Error Parameter Display an error icon at the left of station icon Error Station Type Mismatch Error at Slave Station Display an error icon at the left of station icon iP Station No Unassigned 7 Error Illegal loop connection detected
288. pad allows numeric values such as device values to be entered only with the mouse operation 1 Enabling disabling numerical pad Operating procedure 1 ZD Option Numerical Pad After the setting a numerical pad is displayed by clicking a numeric value input field The setting is disabled by selecting this menu again 2 Entering values using numerical pad Screen display XT Click a numeric value input field on a screen Numerical Pad ay Back crear pid Ps a a a Operating procedure 1 Click the buttons and enter a value 2 Clickthe ok button The value is entered in the numeric value input field 142 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS This chapter explains the methods for diagnosing the board or CC Link IE Field Network status using CC IE Field Utility 13 1 Diagnosing Board This section explains a method for checking the board status Display contents KO Diagnostics gt Board Diagnostics Board Diagnostics Link Refresh ms Channel No Network No are Transmission Status Latest Error Code Maximum Minimum Current 1 Offline No error Board Information m Channel No hse xl Model Name Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Product 121220000000000 B Mode Bus IF Test x Start Test Information m Board Test Test Result Bus I F Test was normaly completed Close Diagnostics CC IE Field diagnosis
289. perating system can be checked by Windows system information For details refer to the Microsoft Knowledge Base http support microsoft com kb 827218 As of August 2013 177 pa Je SU JOU SI JOAUP Y UGUM ZO UOHe e SUIUN UOHE e Su 10 Buooyse qnos Z 9 When the Found New Hardware Wizard screen is not displayed automatically after the board installation update the driver on the Device Manager screen 3 Open the Windows Device Manager screen Right click on g Computer Management By Fie Action View Window Help l e Hm amp 2 m rza C Computer Management Local A iG System Tools a ga Event Viewer Fs Shared Folders fe 2 Local Users and Groups Es Performance Logs and Device Manager i a Network Controller and select Update Driver Software Monitors A Network adapters 5 a Other devices h Network Controller E H Processors Update Driver H Sound video ant pisable Hg Storage volumes Uninstall 3 System devices LiL Scan for hardware changes Launches the Hardware Update Wizard for the selected device Properties Found New Hardware Wizard 4 Click Install from a list or specific location Advanced Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for Network Controller If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 4 or floppy disk
290. played on the screen is not effective while installation 174 16 2 4 When the driver is not installed 0 0 0 0 0 cc ee tence nes 177 16 3 Troubleshooting for Personal Computer and Utility 20 0 2 0 0 eee eee 179 16 3 1 Personal computer does not start or shuts down 0 0 0 0 ee ee 179 16 3 2 Utility does not StartUp 660i g2 cae meet Geta too he a i ok Gotu seb E 180 16 3 3 The screen or operation is abnormal 00 00000 cee eee eee 180 16 3 4 Corrective action displayed on the screen is not effective 0 0 000 e eee 181 16 3 5 Personal computer operates slowly 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 182 16 4 Troubleshooting for Board and Driver 0 0 0 0 000 eens 182 16 4 1 Hardware error or board WDT error 2 0 eee een eee 182 16 4 2 Driver WDT error 1 cence teen ence eens 183 164 3 Diver does NOL Slats cau ens cow sree kde hava pa eau eau ERER SE 183 TOA BUS CHOP a ccten cs E he et es et eed eed Had eae ba due 183 16 5 Troubleshooting for Data Link a a 06 a2 eeeens sees dee se eden dae Siwvawee es 184 16 5 1 Communication error ERR LED is ON Flashing 0000 cece eee ee eee nee 184 16 5 2 User program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU 185 16 5 3 Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program 185 16 54 Station is disconnected 4 1 eic5 5 ieee rard ne eee ede he eed wea 185 16 5 5 Communic
291. ple sending and receiving execute one after completion of another c Example e When accessing from the own station to multiple other stations simultaneously Change the channel used for the own station for each target station Station No 0 Station No 1 Own station Other station Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Station No 2 Other station Channel 1 Channel 1 For send Channel 2 For send SEND E e When accessing mutually between the own station and another station Change the channel used for the own station for each sending and receiving of data Station No 0 Station No 1 Own station Other station Channel 1 For send SEND Channel 1 Channel 1 RECV Channel 1 For receive Channel 2 For receive RECV Channel 2 Channel 2 SEND Channel 2 For send tf UOH OUNA AOAY CGNAS VS 2 SEND function The SEND function sends data from the own station to the specified channel of the specified station using the mdSend mdSendEx function of MELSEC data link library function Own station Target station Target station CPU module User application main Channel 1 Channel 1 mdOpen 181 1 amp path mdSendEx path 1 1 END function mdClose path Channel 2 Channel 2 Point Sending data to the same channel of the target station Send the data after the target station has been read the specified channel data An error will be occurred if sending the
292. possibility of path switching gt SM1600 D1590 2 SD1690 2 Possibility of path switching Reference Since a system switching request from the network module parecer OFF Either one is other than 0 ae in this section was detected path switching may have been executed Figure 1 Since another system error occurred path switching may Page ee 4X c ON in this section have been executed Figure 2 Since another system error occurred or a system switching _ 220 4 c in thi i ON Either one is other than 0 request from the network module was detected path L switching may have been executed Figure a 1 Even if SM1600 is ON path switching does not occur when the CPU is not accessed via the tracking cable 2 When using SM1600 SD1590 and SD1690 to estimate the occurrence of path switching for the Redundant CPU connected via MELSECNET H check the following items on the Redundant settings in the network parameter of GX Developer e Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout e Issue system switch in communication error Check the following based on the statuses of the above special relay and special registers and remove the error Cause e Check the Redundant CPU for an error e Check the tracking cable status and whether the tracking cable is correctly connected e Check both the relevant network module and the network where that relevant network module is connected for an error 219 W JS S Nda uepunp
293. power supply for the system in all phases before installing the board to or removing it from the personal computer Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the board to fail or malfunction 2 Precautions for installing the board e Fix the board by tighten the board fixing screws within the specified torque range Undertightening may cause drop of the component or wire short circuit or malfunction Overtightening may damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction For the tightening torque of the board fixing screws refer to the manual supplied with the personal computer e Before handling the board touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the board to fail or malfunction e Install the board to a personal computer which is compliant with PCI standard or PCI Express standard Section 2 5 Operating Environment Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunction e Securely insert the board into the PCI slot following the board installation instruction of the personal computer Incorrect insertion of the board may lead to a malfunction failure or drop of the board e When installing the board care should be taken not to get injured by an implemented component or a surrounding member e When installing the board care should be taken not to contact with other boards 50 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OP
294. presentative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the station number in the setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the number of total slave stations in the setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Change the station type value in the setting data to any of 0 to 3 and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct the link device offset or size of slave station s in the setting data and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Set the target station number in the REMFR REMTO instruction to the station number of an intelligent device station e Reconnect the target station of the REMFR REMTO instruction e Set any of 1 to 239 to Switch 1 network No in the intelligent function module switch setting of the master local module SI BPOD 10113 691 e When activating as a master station set 0 to Switch 2 in the intelligent function module switch setting o
295. q ZZE WIOMION PIa J1 4UIT OD Buisoubeig Zep Data link unperformed Disconnected station status monitor a a Page 155 6 in this section Selected Station Communication Status Monitor The selected station status and error details are not displayed Display of selected station status and when using a module which is not ae Page 155 7 in this section error details supported by the selected station communication status monitor function of CC IE Field Utility Slave station number setting Only for slave stations whose number has not been set 147 Diagnostics target Item Restrictions Reference Master Local station station Operation Test For a local station this function can Link Start Stop only be performed on an own Page 160 Section 13 2 5 station Information Confirmation Set Events that can be collected differ Network Event History Page 161 Section 13 2 6 Ea to the station type Reserved Station Function Enable Station Function Enable A For a local station reserved Page 163 Section 13 2 7 Temporary Error Invalid Station Llc icteelai stations temporary error invalid Restore stations can only be displayed Page 164 Section 13 2 8 Point Starting from the Board Diagnostics screen CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics can also be started from the Board Diagnostics screen Page 143 Section 13 1 Operating procedure 1 Select a station to be diagn
296. quence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the RUN status of each station s CPU module OFF All stations are in RUN or STEP RUN status ON Station in STOP or PAUSE status found If a station in STOP or PAUSE status is found the status of each station can CPU RUN status be checked by the CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 each station Depending on the timing of the link refresh the CPU RUN status each station SWOOFO to SWOOF7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan SBOOFO Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the RUN status of the master station s CPU module OFF RUN or STEP RUN status CPU RUN status ON STOP or PAUSE status SBOOF 1 master station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF D Stores the stop error status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Station with stop error found If a station with a stop error is found the status of each station can be checked l by the CPU operation status each station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 CPU operation status aa SB0100 asain Depending on the timing of the link refresh the CPU operation status each O each station station 1 SW0100 to SW0107 and the update may be of
297. r for the data link on the network e Communication error ERR LED is ON Flashing Page 184 Section 16 5 1 e User program cannot be accessed to CPU module other than QCPU K Page 185 Section 16 5 2 e Communication cannot be performed occasionally when executing user program Page 185 Section 16 5 3 e Station is disconnected K Page 185 Section 16 5 4 16 5 1 Communication error ERR LED is ON Flashing When the ERR LED is ON flashing due to the communication error check the following items 1 ERR LED is ON One of the following error occurred e An all station error is detected e Stations with same station number exist on the network e The network parameter is corrupted e The network parameter does not match the installation status Reserved station specification number of connected stations network number etc Check the following items Item Corrective action Is the network parameter set according to the actual board j Check the parameter settings lt Page 111 Section 10 2 installation status Is the board error occurred e Perform the board test Page 195 Section 16 7 9 e Perform the board standalone test L Page 195 Section 16 7 10 1 Does the hardware of the board operate properly If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to L Page 202 Section 16 8 2 ERR LED is flashing The error station is detected Check the following items Item Corrective action Is a dis
298. r persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Write the network parameters again e Correct the network parameters and retry the operation D622H Number of total slave stations error D624H Constant link scan time setting error D625 Block data assurance per station setting error D628H Station type error D629H Station No range error The system failed to start data link due to any of the following causes Remove the cause of the problem and retry the operation e No station number setting e Own station error e Master station duplication e Station type mismatch e No master station e Invalid station number of the own station e Duplication of the own station number e Own station specified as reserved station e Parameter error e Parameters being sent e Parameters not received Only the master station and no slave stations exist e Link stop instruction SI BPOD 10113 691 e Specify the network number station type and station number in the switch setting and execute the instruction again in the condition in which the network parameters are not set e Specify relevant station s in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 and retry the operation e For a local station temporary error invalid station setting cancel and reserved station function disable enable cannot be execut
299. rameter error status each O station SW0170 to SW0177 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored This stores if a reserved station function is disabled OFF No disabled reserved station function ON Disabled reserved station function found If a reserved station function is disabled the status of each station can be checked by the Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 O Depending on the timing of the link refresh the Reserved station function disable status SW0180 to SW0187 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF 239 s17 GS Aej y Jeloeds yu xIpueddy Appendix 4 Link Special Register SW List 240 Link special registers SW store information during data link as numerical values Error locations and causes can be checked by using and monitoring link special registers SW in programs 1 Application of link special registers SW By using link special registers SW the status of the CC Link IE Field Network can be checked 2 Ranges of areas that are turned ON OFF by users and by the system The following is a range when the link special register SW is assigned from SW0000 to SWO1FF e Range where data are st
300. ransient transmission programs For transient transmission programs interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW L gt Page 228 Appendix 3 Page 240 Appendix 4 e Baton pass status own station SB0047 e Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 168 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 16TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the identification of the causes and corrective actions when an error occurred Perform the troubleshooting in the following order in case of trouble 1 Basic checking procedure Check if there is the corresponding error symptom written in Error Examples lt Page 170 Section 16 1 If the corresponding error could not be found check the cause by following the procedure shown below 1 Check if all the boards installed ona personal computer are displayed with the utility Checking channel numbers K Page 195 Section 16 7 8 Checking operations with board diagnostics Page 195 Section 16 7 9 2 Check the LED display of the board e Check the LED status Page 196 Section 16 7 11 3 Check the error occurring at the utility Checking operations with tests Page 195 Section 16 7 10 Checking network status with CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics 4 gt Page 200 Section 16 7 12 Checking network status with monitoring link special relays SB and link special registers SW Page 201 Section 16 7 13 4 Check the access target devic
301. rd installation status and reinstall the board e If the board operates normally on other personal computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair Is displayed next to the icon on the Device Manager screen or replace the personal computer e lf the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board If any of the above actions do not solve the error refer to K gt Page 202 Section 16 8 2 is displayed next to the icon however the CC Link IE Field Network board is recognized normally El fe MELSEG OC Link IE Field Device l MELSEG CGC Link IE Field Controller Point Do not uninstall or disable the driver of the board on the Device Manager when the board is normally recognized If it is uninstalled or disabled the operating system may shut down blue screen 192 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 7 Checking operations with event viewer Check the operations of the board with the Windows event viewer 1 For error events Errors occurred in the driver are displayed in the system log of the event viewer Errors related to the CC Link IE Field Network board are displayed as Mccief in the source field of the event viewer The following explains error messages and their corrective actions Point For multiple errors check the occurrence order occurrence time on the event viewer screen and perform corrective actions from the first error that occurred
302. re Sha Manual Local System H Multimedia Class Sched Automatic Local System l 2 Net Msmq Listener Ada Disabled Network Servic amp Net Pipe Listener Adapter Disabled Local Service Net Tcp Listener Adapter i Disabled Local Service amp Net Tcp Port Sharing Se Disabled Local Service amp Netlogon Manual Local System amp Network Access Protecti The Networ Manual Network Servic amp Network Connections Manages o Manual Local System amp Network List Service Identifies th Manual Local Service amp Network Location Awar Collects an Automatic Network Servic amp Network Store Interface This service Automatic Local Service X Office Source Engine Manual Local System amp Offline Files The Offline Automatic Local System amp Parental Controls This service Local Service Start the service J euepyamodoJSIIN Xipueddy J euepyamodo JSJN Huyay g e xipueddy Zit Appendix 14Emc AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES Compliance with the EMC Directive which is one of the EU directives has been mandatory for the products sold within EU member states since 1996 as well as compliance with the Low Voltage Directive since 1997 To prove the compliance manufactures must issue an EC Declaration of Conformity and the products must bear a CE marking 1 Sales representative in EU member states The authorized representative in EU member states will be Company name Mitsubishi Electric Europe
303. re held regardless of the setting i j Area that is dependent on the setting of the intelligent device station dae n Ea 5s i Master station Intelligent Board device station Station i i Station number 1 number 1 Station Station ie 2 number 2 Station Station number 3 number 3 Station l i Station Station number 1 number 1 number 1 Station Station Station number T number 2 number 2 Station Station Station number 3 number 3 number 3 RWw RWr number 1 number 1 number 1 Station Station Station number 2 E number 2 Station Station Station number 3 Staion number 3 RWr RWw number 1 number 1 il number 1 Station Station Station number 2 oe number 2 number 2 Station Station Station number 3 number 3 number 3 Station eo a 3 ee o a a a a o a a a a a a a a a o a a a a 3s B a o a Bg BP e a BF EF a EK me e e e e e e e e E e ee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee e m 1 Setting method Input status of data link faulty station can be set in the Network Operation Setting L gt Page 117 Section 10 2 3 72 CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 5 Cyclic transmission stop and restart During debugging and other operations cyclic transmission can be stopped Data reception from the slave stations and data transmission from the own station can be stopped The stopped cyclic transmission can be restart
304. refresh between the driver Station and the board 2 Clickthe amp d _ button uzas uoNeinByUOd YIOMION Z Z OL JOaJBWeJeY YIOMION uS ZOL 115 a Link scan mode setting The constant link scan can be set by checking the check box Set this item to perform cyclic transmission at constant intervals Link scan will be performed by the interval set in this item However when the actual link scan time is longer than constant link scan time cyclic transmission is performed by link scan time While constant link scan is used to keep link scan time constant the transmission delay time is not kept constant by this function Set constant link scan in increments of ims 2 Equal assignment Equally assign link devices to local stations with preset conditions Display contents W View gt Network Parameter gt CC IE Field Number of Boards Setting screen c gt Network Configuration Setting gt Network Configuration Setting screen c gt Equal Assignment button Equal Assignment RXIRY Equal Assignment Start Station Station End Station Station Start No Total Points Assigned RiWwiRwWr Equal Assignment 4 Start Station Station End Station Station Start No Total Points Assigned Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description RX RY Equal Assignment Set the start station number of local stations for which link devices are equally assign
305. rent types of bit devices and one type of word devices double word devices simultaneously The displayed information of devices is the same as that of the batch monitor function Screen display XW Menu lt gt 16 point register monitor Y 0013 oo OOO _ o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 poyan Bunoyuow Huyosjas EZ s la p JUIOd 9 p zs H 1 BUOPUON ZEZ 135 12 4 Setting Monitoring Target This section explains the method for setting a programmable controller CPU or CC Link IE Field Network board to be monitored Set a target when starting Device Monitor Utility Screen display W Setting gt Network setting Network Setting Channel 491 cc IE Field m Network Setting Own Sta C Other Sta Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Channel Set the access source channel number to be used Set the monitoring target Network Setting Set the network number and the station number when the access target is at another station 2 Clickthe Execute button tg 4D Point Accessing multiple CPU system Enter 0 for the network number and a value of logical station number which was set in the each utility for the station number 136 CHAPTER 12 MONITORING 12 5 Setting Devices to be Monitored This section explains a method for setting devices to be monitored Screen display W Setting lt gt Device setting lt For
306. request is issued from the network module in another system Description details e Turns ON when an error occurs by redundant system error check Turns ON when any of bits for SD1600 turns ON e Remains OFF when no errors are present e Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to the No of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in own system e Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant module is resolved by the user Each bit b15 to b11 to b1 bO 0 OFF SD1590 o Jo gt onjo 4 ON A Module No 0 Disabled since a CPU module uses two slots Module No 1 Module to the right of a to CPU module Module No 11 Rightmost module on 1 2 slot base unit Q312B e For No of module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system refer to SD1690 e Any of the following bits turns ON corresponding to the No of the module for which system switching request is issued from the network module in another system e Turned OFF by the system after the error of the relevant module is resolved by the user Each bit b15 to b11 to b1 bO 9 OFF SD1690 o 0 4 onlo 4 0N A Module No 0 Disabled since a CPU module uses two slots Module No 1 Module to the right of a to CPU module Module No 11 Rightmost module on 12 slot base unit Q312B e For No of module for which system sw
307. ring access to the Redundant CPU connected via MELSECNET H the communication path is automatically switched to continue access to the control system Hereinafter this automatic switching of the communication path is referred to as path switching The following describes the path switching conditions checking method of path switching occurrence and access examples of path switching a Path switching conditions When access is being processed under the following conditions access to the Redundant CPU is continued by path switching even though a communication error occurs at 2 a Conditions for continued access Operation mode Backup mode Separate mode Redundant CPU specification Control system Standby system System A System B Note however that if a tracking error had already occurred at a start of communication access to the control system is not continued by path switching even if tracking is recovered after that 4 Includes the status in which either Redundant CPU is powered OFF or reset 218 APPENDIX b Checking method of path switching occurrence When the system is communicating with the redundant system specified whether communication is continued by path switching due to communication error occurrence can be estimated Create a program that monitors the following special relay and special registers to check the occurrence of path switching lt Special relay and special registers to be monitored and estimated
308. rk in ring topology without a switching hub Connecting a switching hub will cause a problem such as data link failure Page 26 Section 2 2 1 When a master local module is used for the master station check if the master local module supports the loopback function If the master local module does not support the loopback function replace the module with the one which supports the loopback function 153 ugas0s sonsoubelp Bulkeydsiq ZZE WIOMION PIP 4 J1 4UIT OD Bulsoubeig Zep c Display of network configuration Network configuration is displayed according to the connection status Network configuration Star topology Line topology Star and line mixed Ring topology Actual system configuration Master station Station No 0 Switching hub Intelligent device Intelligent device Intelligent device station Station No 3 station Station No 4 station Station No 5 Master station Local station Intelligent device Station No 0 Station No 1 station Station No 2 Master station Connection to PORT1 Station No 0 Switching hub T Intelligent device Connection lt i station Station No 4 to PORT2 Local station J fi Intelligent device Station No 1 a station Station No 2 Master station mz Local station Hoa Intelligent device 3 Station No 0 Station No 1
309. rk number etc Flashing A data link error station is detected OFF Operating normally SD OFF Data not sent Receiving data RD OFF Data not received b When the RUN LED is flashing An error which is peculiar to boards has occurred Name Status Description RUN paching One of the following error has occurred Check ERR LED and RD LED ERR PCI bus PCI Express bus error has occurred RD Driver WDT error has occurred c When checking channel number The status is displayed as shown below according to the current channel number while opening the Channel No Setting screen lt Page 125 Section 11 1 lt 181 gt lt 182 gt lt 183 gt lt 184 gt ERR SD ERR SD ERR SD ERE SD RUM aD RUN RD RUN RD RUN RD 46 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2 Connector The PORT1 and PORT2 connector for CC Link IE Field Network RJ45 connector LERLED LINK LED a RJ45 connector Connect an Ethernet cable lt _ gt Page 57 Section 4 6 2 b Connector part LED Display the link status and reception status of the CC Link IE Field Network board Name Status Description e The module received abnormal data e The board is performing loopback or OFF e The module received normal data e The board does not perform loopback ani Linkup in progress OFF Linkdown in progress No U o Z D D n 47 4 3 48 Installation This section explains precautions for
310. rmal communication in progress on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 04H Normal loopback communication in progress on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 Normal cable disconnected on PORT1 communication in progress Connection status own on PORT2 SW0064 station Disconnecting cable disconnected on PORT1 and PORT2 x Disconnecting cable disconnected on PORT1 establishing line on PORT 2 Disconnecting establishing line on PORT1 cable disconnected on PORT2 Disconnecting establishing line on PORT1 and PORT2 Normal cable disconnected on PORT1 loopback communication in progress on PORT2 Swoo066 Actual link scan time lower 1 word Stores the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit us SW0067 Actual link scan time upper 1 word occurrence rate max When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate current value of received error frames at the own station s PORT1 Unit When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored PORT 1 line error SWO0069 occurrence rate present occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occurrence rate maximum value of received error frames at PORT2 line error the own station s PORT2 Unit occurrence rate max When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored SWOO06A occurrence rate is cleared Stores the occu
311. ror e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOAO0 to SWO0A 7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored 252 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local A station station Stores the continuation error status for each station 0 Normal 1 Continuation error b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi b0 sworto 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 swort1 231 30 20 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2120 19 16 17 swo112 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 swo113 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 swo114 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 74 70 69 68 67 66 65 SW0110 Swo115 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 CPU operation status to ene Sw0116112 1114 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 O SW0117 swot17 fraolt 19 1 18 t17frt6 1 15 1 14 113 Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SW00A7 e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station
312. rrence rate current value of received error frames at the own station s PORT2 Unit When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored PORT 2 line error SWO06B occurrence rate present occurrence rate is cleared SI7 MS Ja sIBey Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed The other loopback station number can be checked by Loopback station number 2 SW0071 igeabacesaion 0 No loopback stations SW0070 1 to 120 Slave station number 1 125 Master station 65535 Station number not set If a station whose station number duplicates is performing loopback this register stores the duplicated number Stores the occurrence rate maximum value of received error frames at PORT 1 line error the own station s PORT1 Unit SW0068 l O 247 Number SW0071 SW0074 SW0075 SW0076 SW0077 SW007A SW007C SW007D SWOO07E SW007F 248 Loopback station number 2 PORT1 cable disconnection detection count PORT1 receive error detection count PORT1 total number of received data lower 1 word PORT1 total number of received data upper 1 word Event count PORT2 cable disconnection detection count PORT2 receive error detection count PORT2 total number of received data lower 1 word PORT2 total number of received data upper 1 word Availability Master Local station station Description
313. rror frame reception status each station PORT2 error frame reception status master station PORT1 error frame detection each station Description Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT1 error frame reception status each station SW0120 to SW0127 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame is received at the master station s PORT 1 OFF An error frame has not yet been received ON An error frame has been received Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores if an error frame is received at each station s PORT2 OFF An error frame has not yet been received at any stations ON An error frame has been received at one or more stations If an error frame has been received the status of each station can be checked by the PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW0130 to SW0137 Depending on the timing of the link refresh the PORT2 error frame reception status each station SW01
314. s ON or OFF Calculation value calculation formulas Normal value SM x 0 5 LS x 1 slave station response time ms Maximum value SMx1 LS x2 slave station response time ms SM Master station link refresh time LS Link scan time 2 Master station RY Slave station output The following table shows the time after the board device is turned ON or OFF until the output of the slave station is turned ON or OFF Calculation value calculation formulas Normal value SM LS x 1 slave station response time ms Maximum value SM LS x 2 slave station response time ms SM Master station link refresh time LS Link scan time aul Bulsseo0jg G xipueddy oul Aejap uoissiwusues G xipueddy 259 Appendix 6 Differences in Cyclic Transmission Modes This section explains the differences between Online Normal Mode and Online High Speed Mode for the CC Link IE Field Network board Refer to the information in this section to select Online Normal Mode and Online High Speed Mode 1 Differences in performance specifications The following items can be selected Item Online Normal mode Online High speed mode Maximum number of RWw send points per local station 1024 points 2048 bytes 256 points 512 bytes Maximum number of transients per link scan 4 slave stations x 1 5 4 2 Differences in link scan time The link scan times in normal mode and high speed mode are shown below when assigning 128
315. s and Family Safety Review your computer s status 8 Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer Find and fix problems 8 Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Network and Internet Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Add a device Ease of Access Programs Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display al Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods C Change display language Fi Uninstall a program A 2 Select Administrative Tools Control Panel Home Action Center System and Security Review your computer s status and resolve issues is Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time Network and Internet Hardware and Sound Windows Firewall Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall Programs User Accounts and Family Ra System 3 Safety View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index Appearance and Allow remote access See the name of this computer Device Manager Personalization i Windows Update Clock Language and Region Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates Ease of Access Power Opti
316. s communicated upon request gt Page 74 Section 5 3 User program Local station CPU module main mdOpen 181 1 amp path mdSendEx path 1 1 nag mdClose path Write request Write data o aT 21 22 2 1Gbps communication speed 1Gbps communication speed allows high speed communication Also the takt time can be reduced due to the improved performance of communication response 3 Use of Ethernet cable A 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet is used for the connection interface The wiring cost can be reduced because 1000BASE T compliant Ethernet cables are commercially available lt gt Page 33 Section 2 4 1 1000BASE T 4 Flexible wiring for the system arrangements The network can be wired into star topology line topology and ring topology lt gt Page 26 Section 2 2 2 For star topology a 1OOOBASE T design switching hub can be used gt Page 33 Section 2 4 2 Wiring is highly flexible because a network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies For example the control panels can be connected through a star topology and the production lines through a line topology Star topology CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 CC Link IE Field Network Board CC Link IE Field Network board allows the connection of a personal computer to CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Field Network board can be used as either a master station or local station
317. s of CC Link IE Field Network 1 A personal computer can be easily connected to CC Link IE Field Network A system which contains a personal computer as a master station or local stations of the CC Link IE Field Network system can be configured CC Link IE Field Network 2 System controls and high speed data collection For a reduction of takt time in a manufacturing system control data logging data of manufacturing processes management data for traceability and management diagnostic data for equipment predictive maintenance can be collected at high speed and monitored A control system using a programming language such as C language can be configured when a personal computer is used as a master station Control data and logging data can be collected at high speed when a personal computer is used as a local station A control system using a programming language such as C language can be configured when a personal computer is used as a master station peog HIOMJON PlO l4 Al AUT OO CL Control data and logging data can be collected at high speed when a personal computer is used as a local station 23 3 User programs created using existing boards can be utilized For user programs to use CC Link IE Field Network board the function level compatibility can be maintained because the common interface MELSEC data link functions with the existing boards can be used Therefore user programs created using the existi
318. s safely even when a fault occurs in a personal computer Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction 1 Emergency stop circuits protection circuits and protective interlock circuits for conflicting operations such as forward reverse rotations or upper lower limit positioning must be configured external to the programmable controller 2 The station to which the board is installed may be disconnected from the data link due to a data link error If this occurs the data output from the station and written to other stations before the error will be held until the station is reconnected to the network until its data link is restarted Provide a mechanism for data link status monitoring and error handling for each station that is connected to the data link system For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to this manual Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident When changing data during operation configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely Configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the personal computer and CPU module in case of a communication failure CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm
319. s set an error may occur under the following condition Data are read l When attempting data read by executing the mdReceive mdReceiveEx function immediately after the send data completion at the sending station No reception data error occurs because data have not yet been immediately after the send data completion at the e Retry it after a little while stored to the reception buffer of the driver sending station e Retry it after a little while e Change the storage channel of the target Data are sent When attempting data send consecutively Channel busy dedicated instruction error occurs at the sending station because the channel is being used by the driver and thus the sent data cannot be received consecutively from the sending station station When 128 received data are stored to the reception buffer of each channel number the 129th and the following received data are discarded by the driver after they are received by the board and before they are stored to the reception buffer When the data whose execution type is set to with arrival confirmation are sent from the sending side a normal completion is established at the sending side because the board receives data once however data are Normally completed data at the sending e Retry it after a little while side are discarded discarded b Event notification Events can be notified to a user program at the data reception
320. setting L gt Page 228 Appendix 3 when receiving data from another station Reception i RECV execution request flag when data Event setting of channel l i buffer of i from another station are received f that received data RECV function SB0030 SB0031 With setting Event setting is not applicable No change With event setting Without setting Without event setting Flag turns ON e When data are not received at the execution of mdReceiveEx mdReceive function The following table shows the operation status according to each setting when data are not received at the execution of mdReceiveEx mdReceive function Reception A Event setting of channel Operation status of ulrer oO that received data mdReceiveEx mdReceive function RECV function With setting Event setting is not applicable The function ends with an error With event setting No reception data error The function waits for up to the time specified for Transient timeout monitoring time gt Page 120 Section 10 2 5 Without setting When data are received The function ends Without event setting normally When data are not received The function ends with an error Response timer timeout dedicated instruction CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS 5 5 Reserved Station Specification and Reserved Station Function Disable Function Reserved station specification allows setting of a station that is not actually connected at present but will be connected to the n
321. slave stations can be connected to master station Network topology stations per network Local station 120 stations Maximum number of networks 239 Communication method Token passing method 4 This indicates the point which can be assigned for one station by master station For local station the data from other station can be received other than the point written in the table 2 For Online High speed mode 256 points and 512 bytes Page 112 Section 10 2 1 Specification Item Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Q81BD J71GF11 T2 Number of boards that can be installed Up to 4 PCI bus slot or PCI X slot PCI Express X1 X4 X8 X16 slot Half size Standard low profile half size Internal current consumption 1 10A 5VDC 1 68A 3 3VDC Weight 0 11k Standard size 0 08kg i a Low profile size 0 07kg Installation slot 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 List of Buffer Memory Addresses The buffer memory is used for exchanging data between the CC Link IE Field Network board and the master local module The content of the buffer memory returns to the default initial values when the power is turned off or the CC Link IE Field Network board is reset Address Initial iti Decimal Read write Refer to Hexadecimal ae x i 0 to 1023 0 to 3FFH Remote input RX Read 400H to 7FFH Remote output RY Read write 2048 to 10239 10240 to 18431 2800H to 47FFH Link device area Remote register RWr e 18432 to 18
322. software m __ More Info Security Alert Driver Installation A The driver software you are installing for WinDriver has not been properly signed with Authenticode T M technology Therefore Windows cannot tell if the software has been modified since it was published The publisher s identity cannot be verified because of a problem The signature contains a time stamp However the time stamp could not be verified Do you still want to install this driver software No __ More Info CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING procedure Confirm the publisher is MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION and click the button This screen may be displayed a couple of times The message is displayed when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is set to disabled Reinstall the utility after searching the Turn Windows features on or off on the control panel and enabling the function of NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 The procedure when NET Framework 3 5 including NET 2 0 and 3 0 is disabled is the same procedure as MELSOFT products For details of the procedure refer to the technical bulletin FA A 0153 2 Using Windows XP Windows Server 2003 R2 procedure This screen is displayed at the first installation Click the Continue 4nyway button The operation test has been conducted by Mitsubishi Problems do not occur after the installation The following screen may appear behind
323. ss stopped 4 Test in progress 5 Offline gt e e Stores the cause of interruption in the communication baton pass of own station OOH At normal communication or power on Cause of baton pass 30H Cable disconnection O interruption 33H Disconnection or reconnection in progress 40H Offline mode 41H Hardware test 42H Self loopback test SW0048 Stores the cause which stopped the data link of own station OOH At normal communication or power on 01H Stop command issued 02H Monitoring timeout O5H No slave stations master station only 10H Parameter not received local stations only 11H Own station number out of range 12H Own station specified as reserved SW0049 Cause of data link stop 13H Station number duplication own station SI7 MS Ja sIBey Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy 14H Master station duplication 16H Station number not set 18H Parameter error 19H Parameter communication in progress 1AH Station type mismatch 20H CPU module stop error 60H Incorrect ring topology configuration master station only 243 Number SWO004A SW004B SW004C SW0050 SW0051 244 Data link stop request station Own station s CPU status Parameter setting status Data link start status own station Data link stop status own station Availability Description Master Local station station Stores the station number of the station that performed the cyclic transmission
324. ster station cancel the reserved station setting e Change the station number of the own station to a station number that is not reserved e Change the station number so that it will not be duplicated with any other station number e After taking the above action power off and then on all the stations that detected the station number duplication error or reset them e Add information of the own station to Network Configuration Setting of the master station e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e After taking the above action power OFF and then ON all the stations that detected this error or reset them DOFOH to D113H e Refer to corrective action for hardware error _ Page 214 1 in this section D200H D201H D202H D203H D204H D205H D206H D207H D208H 204 Double transient data received Header information error in transient data Send buffer full Read write address error in transient data Network No error in transient data Target station No error in transient data Network No error in transient data Incorrect number of relays specified in transient data Network No error in transient data e Check the network condition by CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics and take action e Check if the cables and switching hub are connected properly e
325. switch status of the own board Read the version information of the own board Refresh the programmable controller device address Batch write devices Send data SEND function Batch read devices Receive data RECV function Write devices randomly Read devices randomly Set a bit device Reset a bit device 1 A function in which the access range is extended according to the extension of the device points at the access target It is accessible to all device numbers Use extended functions when creating a new program 2 Applicable only for 32 bit version user application 3 For the version of CC Link IE Field Network board and SW1DNC CCIEF B that can be used for the functions refer to K gt Page 265 Appendix 10 1 CHAPTER 14 MELSEC DATA LINK LIBRARY Point Details on MELSEC data link library For details on the functions refer to the following manual MELSEC Data Link Library Reference Manual 167 CHAPTER 15pROGRAMMING This chapter explains CC Link IE Field Network programming 15 1 Precautions on Programming This section explains precautions for creating CC Link IE Field Network programs 1 Cyclic transmission programs For cyclic transmission programs interlock with the following link special relay SB and link special register SW L gt Page 228 Appendix 3 Page 240 Appendix 4 e Data link status own station SB0049 e Data link status each station SWOOBO to SWO00B7 2 T
326. t Page 157 Section s 13 2 5 8 5 s 7 a Point shows Point notes that req uires The link start stop is not available in loop test mode o tt ti When the board is reset or the system is powered off and then on attention Even if cyclic transmission was stopped by link stop it will be restarted by resetting the board or powering off and then on the system Station where link start cannot be performed Link start cannot be performed in the following cases Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error Station where link was stopped by a command from another station Station where link was stopped by link special relay SB or link special register sw 1 Selecting Forced Link Start will start the link GED shows useful QD eeeeeeeeesreerererererseeeeecerererseeeeeeeeereseeeeee information Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped with link special relay SB and link special register SW gt Page 223 Appendix 3 Page 235 Appendix 4 71 Ex shows setting or A setting to perform transient transmission from the station number 2 on the network number 1 to the station operating examples number 4 on the network number 3 CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 No 0 No 1 C liss oono oooo 0000 0m0 oooo Station Station No 5 No 4 Request target Station Station No 2 No 3 For the accessible devices and ranges of CC Link IE Field Network board refer to the following manu
327. t be expected occasionally The general specifications both CC Link IE Field Network board and a personal computer must be satisfied after installation 39 3 2 Performance Specifications Performance specifications of the CC Link IE Field Network board are shown below Item Specification 16384 points 2KB 16384 points 2KB 8192 points 16KB 8192 points 16KB 16384 points 2KB 16384 points 2KB RY Master station 8192 points 16KB Maximum link points per network 8192 points 16KB 2048 points 256 bytes 2048 points 256 bytes Maximum link points per station 1 Local station 1024points 2048 bytes 2 1024 points 2048 bytes 2 Communication speed 1Gbps An Ethernet cable that meets the 1000BASE T standard Category 5e or higher double shielded STP straight cable lt Page 33 Section 2 4 1 100m max Compliant with ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e lt Page 55 Section 4 6 1 3 Line topology 12000m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave Connection cable Maximum station to station distance stations Overall cable distance Star topology Depends on the system configuration Ring topology 12100m when connected to 1 master station and 120 slave stations Number of cascade connections Up to 20 Line topology star topology coexistence of both line topology and star topology is possible ring topology Number of connectable Master station 1 station up to 120
328. t before v Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer r Program name Setup exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer VY Show details Yes No Change when these notifications appear User Account Control screen in which the password is required to be entered System stand by screen System hibernate screen For the error code refer to the following section KL Page 203 Section 16 9 a aa ae a aaa l User Account Control m Corrective action This screen is displayed when user account control is enabled Click Allow or the xes _ button For the method for disabling the screen refer to K gt Page 265 Appendix 11 e This screen is displayed when the log on user does not have administrator authority Log on as a user with administrator authority The power save mode stand by hibernate is not supported for CC Link IE Field Network board e Configure the settings of the Power Options in the control panel to avoid the computer from activating the power save mode Aistand by hibernate e Check the setting for when the computer s power button is pressed and the settings of the uninterruptible power supply system UPS For the screen displayed at installation refer to the following section KL Page 174 Section 16 2 3 For the screens of the operating system contact the operating system manufacturer For the scree
329. tation number overlap details are not displayed as a selected station even by clicking the icon In such case execute the board diagnostics on the error station and determine the error cause When the error station is a module determine the error cause using the system monitor function of GX Works2 Use the right and left arrow keys to move the focus and press the or key to confirm the selected station The same functions as the functions of Operation Test and Information Confirmation Set can be executed from the menus displayed by right clicking the icon i Temporary Error Invalid Station Setting In Selected Station Reserved Station Function Disable In Selected Station Station No Setting Communication Test Cable Test Link Start Stop Network Event History Reserved Station Function Enable Enable Disable Ignore Station Errors The content of the displayed icons can be confirmed with the __tesends _ button C gt Page 151 Section 13 2 2 4 152 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS b When is displayed in Network Status lt The system does not contain a switching hub gt Although the loopback function is disabled the network is configured in ring topology Perform the following measures e When not using the loopback function Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any stations on the network either PORT1 or PORT2 The network topology will become a line topol
330. tations and 1 master station can be connected Switching hub Ethernet cable 1000BASE T ee eee ee i ee X Master station Slave station 1 station Up to 120 stations 2 Network configuration The network can be wired into star topology line topology and ring topology A network can consist of a combination of star and line topologies but cannot consist of a combination of ring topology and star or line topology 26 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Item Description The network is formed into a star with a switching hub Slave stations can be easily added by this topology Add slave stations one by one If multiple slave stations are added ata Star topology i time all stations on the network are reconnected Therefore an error may momentarily occur in all the stations The connection between the board and modules using an Ethernet cable makes a line Line topology E topology For line topology connections are available without using a switching hub The connection between the board and modules using an Ethernet cable makes a ring Ring topology topology Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally Point Only the slave station in which an error has occurred is disconnected from the network Data link continues with the stations that are operating normally In a line topology all stations connected after the faulty station are disconnected In ring topology data
331. tatus is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bt bO coolest epn e r es aSa detection each station SW0143 Aae erOrErA 51 2 SW0147 SW0144 2019 76177675 7413 7271 70 69 68 67 66 65 swor4s BREE eS 86 85 84 83 82 81 Sw0146 112 114 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 eee SW0147 EEEE E beahrchlrehlrehls Each number in the table a station No is fixed to 0 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Holds the data immediately before the error e This is enabled only for normal stations in the Baton pass status each station SWOOAO0 to SWO0A7 294 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local A station station Stores if an error frame was received from power on until the present on the transmission path at each station s PORT2 0 A line error is not currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT2 1 A line error is currently occurred on the transmission path of the each station s PORT 2 When Clear communication error count SB0006 is turned ON the stored status is cleared b15 b14 b13 b12_b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO swo1so 16 15 14 1312 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 een PORT2 error frame Sinise A detection each station sworsa 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 2 SW0157 swo1s4 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 74 70 69
332. tatus of other board and change the resource on the BIOS setting screen or Device Manager screen e Reinstall the driver of the other optional boards e Replace the other optional boards Does the board operate normally if uninstall the other optional boards Does the board operate normally on another e Reinstall the operating system after formatting HD personal computer e Repair or replace the personal computer For the problem of the personal computer or operating system consult the personal computer or operating system manufacturer 191 yu wuoaua uoneJsado Bulyo9eyD 291 poy wu Buloy 2 91 16 7 6 Checking on Device Manager screen Check if the board is displayed on the Windows Device Manager screen Check Corrective action The board or driver is not installed e If the board is not installed install the board If the board is already installed check the board installation status and reinstall the board e Reinstall the software package L Page 172 Section 16 2 1 e If the board operates normally on other personal computer the personal computer may have any problems In this case repair Is the driver name of the board not displayed on the Device Manager screen or replace the personal computer e lf the board does not operate normally on other personal computer replace the board The board installation failed e Reinstall the software package L Page 172 Section 16 2 1 e Check the boa
333. ted normally the following utilities are registered a Utility When the installation is completed normally the utilities shown below are registered in the Start of Windows 1 Start All App or Start All programs Folder Utility name Description Lomi CC IE Fiel lity 2 Utility to setting board and displaying status i ili ili i i i US CC IE Field Board ey y g praying Utility to monitoring devices and changing the MELSEC Device Monitor Utility device value UOHE E SU CY 2 CC IE Field Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later 3 Device Monitor Utility Board is displayed as the icon name when using SW1DNC CCIEF B Version 1 06G or later b MELSEC Data Link Library MELSEC data link library is used for the following software packages in common When the utilities are installed on the same personal computer the newer MELSEC data link library of the software package is enabled When the installation is completed normally the manual of MELSEC data link library is registered in the MELSEC folder as the same folder as the utility Point e In order to view the manuals Adobe Reader is required Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated web site duct e When using 64 bit version operating system the icon may not be displayed even when Adobe Reader is installed 89 Software package Version Manual name
334. tem amp Service Co Ltd 2 4 2 Hubs Use hubs that meet the conditions listed below Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions e Compliance with the IEEE802 3 1000BASE T e Support of the auto MDI MDI X function e Support of the auto negotiation function SeIQeo lve S JUBUOGWOD YIOMIOSN Z e Switching hub layer 2 switch 1 1 A repeater hub is not available 1 Mitsubishi product Type Model name Industrial switching hub NZ2EHG T8 33 2 9 Operating Environment The following table shows the operating environment for the CC Link IE Field Network board Item Personal computer Required memory PCI bus specifications CPU PCI Express bus specifications Operating English version Monitor system i 2 Hard disk space Disk drive 34 Description Windows supported personal computer System requirements of the operating system must be met For Q80BD J71GF11 T2 e Compliant with PCI standard Rev 2 2 3 3VDC 5VDC 32 bit bus 33MHz frequency For Q81BD J71GF11 T2 e Compliant with PCI Express bus standard 1 1 3 3VDC maximum data bandwidth of 250MB s 100MHz frequency Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 3 or later Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 3 or later Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 or later Microsoft
335. ters a Remote Desktop Connection Default Programs ae Magnifier Help and Support All Programs Search programs and files p Shut down ma 2 Select System and Security D k EF gt Control Panel 5 Search Control Panel P wew Adjust your computer s settings View by Category System an ri User Accounts and Family Safety Review your computer s status Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer Set up parental controls for any user Find and fix problems _ Network and Internet Change the theme Connect to the Internet Change desktop background View network status and tasks Adjust screen resolution Choose homegroup and sharing options Hardware and Sound D Clock Language and Region View devices and printers Change keyboards or other input methods Add a device Ease of Access Connect to a projector Let Windows suggest settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings Optimize visual display j k Appearance and Personalization Programs Uninstall a program A 3 Select Change User Account Control settings GO Control Panel Home Action Center Review your computer s status and resolve issues tem and Security Spt Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Network and Internet Restore your computer to an earlier time Hardwe d Sound as e Windows Firewall Programs Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewal
336. the network v Execute a user program Execute a user program or utility Od UO U 0 U0 UU 44 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 4 2 Part Names This section explains each part name of the CC Link IE Field Network board lt Q80BD J71GF11 T2 gt No U o Z D 3 D n 45 Description Reference l l Page 46 Section 4 2 Operation LED Indicates the operating status of the CC Link IE Field Network board 1 Indicates the PORT1 connector for connecting to CC Link IE Field Network Page 47 Section 4 2 Indicates the PORT2 connector for connecting to CC Link IE Field Network 2 1 Indicator LED Display the operating status of the CC Link IE Field Network board If an error occurred refer to the troubleshooting and take a corrective action lt Page 196 Section 16 7 11 FER SD EUH ED a When the RUN LED is OFF or ON The same LED display as a network module Name Status Description Operating normally RUN One of the following error has occurred OFF e A hardware failure or a board WDT error has occurred e The driver is not started One of the following error has occurred e An error was detected in all stations ON e Modules with same station number exist on the network e A network parameters is corrupted ERR e The network parameter does not match the installation Reserved station specification number of connected stations netwo
337. the personal computer may lead to a slight installation error When the board side connector is covered with the personal computer Ethernet cable can not be connected properly Check the board installation status not to overlap the connector and the personal computer Board side connector X Proper alignment Misaligned The connector is not covered The connector is not appeared with the personal computer and can not connect the cable Personal computer e When disconnecting the cable from the board do not pull the cable by the cable part Pulling the cable connected to the board may result in malfunction or damage to the board or cable e Depending on the adjacent boards and installing slot position connecting disconnecting the communication cable may be difficult In this case use the following dedicated tool Product name Maker Patch cord removal tool PCRT 1 Panduit Corp al CC Link IE Field Network board e _ Board side connector 7 Latch gl AME Cable side connector S Patch cord removal tool 4 6 2 Ethernet cable connection 1 Connecting the cable aw LINK LED Point PORT1 and PORT2 need not to be distinguished CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION Turn off a personal computer to which the CC Link IE Field Network board is installed and the connected device Push the Ethernet cable connector into the CC Li nk IE Field Netw
338. the selected project name Compress Destination Setting Enter the folder where the compressed file is saved and the compressed file name The Compressed File Name compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by clicking the _ 2tawse button 2 Click the _ amp mress_ button The compressed project file ifZ is saved in the specified folder 106 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT 2 Unpacking projects saved with compression Unpack a project saved with compression Screen display Project gt Compress Unpack gt Unpack FZ Unpack Source Setting Compressed File Name L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Project 1 ifz Browse T Unpack Destination Project Workspace Folder Path L Documents and Settings xP My Documents Browse Workspace Project List Oo Workspace2 Workspace Name Workspacel Project Name Project1 Unpack and Open Close Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Unpack Source Setting Enter the folder drive path in which the compressed file to be unpacked is saved and the compressed file name Compressed File Name The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by clicking the Browse button Unpack Destination Project Enter the folder drive path to which the project to be unpacked is saved Workspace Folder Path The fol
339. this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Retry it after a little while e Change the channel for the own or target station e Change the channel for the own or target station e An invalid value is set for the control block of the dedicated instruction Correct the value and then retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Check the transient data at the request source and retry the operation e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Another CC Link dedicated instruction is in execution Retry it after a little while e If this error persists please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e The REMFR REMTO instruction is not available for stations other than master and local stations Modify the program so that the REMFR REMTO instruction will not be used e The REMTO instruction is not available for local stations The REMTO instruction must be executed on the master station Error code D261H D262H D263H D264H D265H D266H D267H D268H D269H D26AH D26BH D26CH D26DH D280H D281H D282H St
340. tion _ gt Page 203 Section 16 9 Stores the baton pass status for each station 0 Baton pass normal station 1 Baton pass faulty station e If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan the time until the status changes to 0 Baton pass normal station may vary by several seconds e If no response is received for one link scan the station is determined to be a baton pass faulty station b15 b14 b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO N hpo Jere lsa lai Baton pass status 32 o zs ra ra z2 71 70 so ee orles e5 e a 4 es ez e1 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 109 99 98 97 EE Each number in the table represents a station No is fixed to 0 to h stati SWO0A7 each station Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number SI7 MS Ja sIBay Jeloeds yu y xIpueddy are ignored 249 Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the cyclic transmission status for each station 0 Cyclic transmission normal station 1 Cyclic transmission faulty station e If multiple stations change from faulty to normal because they are reconnected to the network one by one per link scan the time until the status changes to 0 Cyclic transmission normal station may vary by several seconds
341. tion sleep e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 2 Behavior when entering the hibernation mode sleep mode The following explains the behavior of the board when the power save mode hibernate sleep is entered on the personal computer e The CC Link IE Field Network board stops its operation and is disconnected from the network e The board is not reconnected even after the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep e After the personal computer returns from the power save mode hibernate sleep 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Field Network board from the CC IE Field utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Corrective action When the personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section KL Page 275 Appendix 13 dnyejs jse4 JO apo dAeS 1 MOd S194434 JEINdWOdD eUOSIJBY UYM JOIeY9g Z xipueddy d js a euseqiy POW SAes s mod y s1 U Ja Ndwod jeuosued y u ym JOIAeEY9G ZZ Xipueddy 2 3 Appendix 12 3 Behavior when fast startup function is enabled 1 Target operating system The following operating systems have the fast startup function e Windo
342. tion 1 Relay station 2 C o000 0000 0000 Station Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 1 No 4 No 5 No 4 No 5 C C Network No 2 Request target Station Transient transmission response Station Mo Request source Transmit data through station No 3 on network No 1 to communicate with network No 3 Relay Station Mo Relay Pass data to the request source station 1 on network No 1 Transmit data through station No 4 on network No 2 to communicate with network No 3 Target Network Relay Network Relay No Mo Station Mo Relay Passes data to the request target C 2 i station 2 on network No 3 Transmit data through station No 1 on network No 2 to communicate with network No 1 Request Pass data to the relay station target automatically Point Setting for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks Routing parameters are not required for stations that do not perform transient transmission to other networks however setting the same routing parameters to all stations is recommended _ Station which does not perform transient transmission It is recommended to set the same routing parameters as __ for 7 and __ can communicate by the same routing parameters since they pass through the same relay station Note that routing parameters need not to be set for stations for which routing parameters are not available Such as a sta
343. tion 2 6 eee ON SH O80980ENG G Section 2 5 Section 5 1 Section 6 1 Section 6 2 Section 8 1 Section 12 1 Section 12 3 1 Section 12 3 2 Section 12 5 Section 12 6 1 Section 12 7 Section 13 2 Chapter 14 Section 16 2 2 Section 16 2 3 Section 16 7 7 Appendix 10 1 Appendix 10 2 Appendix 11 2 Appendix 12 2 Appendix 12 3 Appendix 13 Apr 2015 SH 080980ENG H Section 2 5 Section 2 6 Section 6 2 Section 13 2 2 Section 16 7 7 Section 16 7 11 Section 16 9 i Jun 2015 SH 080980ENG I Appendix 5 2 Appendix 10 1 Japanese Manual Version SH 080925 J This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2011 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 28 Memo 288 Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be s
344. tion including a head module The station communicates with other networks according to routing parameters set to the master station 124 CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE CHAPTER 11 OPERATING BOARD ONLINE This chapter explains a method for operating a board online using CC IE Field Utility 11 1 Setting Board Channel Numbers This section explains a method for checking setting board channel numbers Display contents W Online gt Channel No Setting Channel No Setting LED of the board is the Following displays while being opening this screen Please change Channel Mo if necessary Channel Mo Current value Channel Mo Setting value Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Channel No Current Value Display current channel numbers of each board Display LED status of each board The status is displayed as shown below according to the current channel number while opening the Channel No Setting screen SJOQUINN jBUULUD PJeOg Bulas LLL LED lt 182 gt lt 183 gt lt 184 gt LO BE BE Channel No Setting Value Set the channel number 2 Click the End button Channel No Setting Value is set to the board Point 181 is set for the board channel number as a factory default When using two or more boards in a single personal computer set channel numbers not to overlap 125 11 2 Writing Reading Parameters to from Board This section explains metho
345. tion number of the station where the cyclic transmission is performed Maximum cyclic Range 1 to 120 0 when own station is disconnected SW005B eas transmission station Conditions e This is enabled when the Data link status own station SBO049 is OFF Stores the maximum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit ms SWO0060 Maximum link scan time Conditions 2 e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the minimum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission Unit ms SW0061 Minimum link scan time Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the current value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission The stored value contains a maximum error of 1 ms Unit ms SW0062 Current link scan time 7 Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF Stores the setting value of the contact link scan that is set in the supplementary setting 0 No setting Constant link scan set 1 to 200 Setting value of contact link scan time Unit ms SW0063 value Conditions e This is enabled when the Data link status own station SBO049 is OFF 246 APPENDIX Availability Number Description Master Local station station Stores the connection status of own station 00H Normal communication in progress on PORT1 and PORT2 01H No
346. tions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF _ Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid request SB0010 is accepted Temporary error invalid SB0058 OFF Not accepted SB0010 is OFF request accept status 4 i ON Invalid accepted SB0010 is ON Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid request accept status SB0058 is Temporary error invalid PO turned ON and the temporary error invalid processing is completed OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion SB0059 setting completion status Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid setting cancel request SB0011 is Temporary error invalid accepted OFF Not accepted ON Cancel accepted SB005A setting cancel request accept status Turns ON when the Temporary error invalid setting cancel request accept Temporary error invalid status SB005A is turned ON and the temporary error invalid setting cancel SB005B setting cancel process is completed completion status OFF Not completed ON Completed or error completion Turns ON when the Reserved station function disable request SB0012 is accepted OFF Not accepted ON Cancel accepted Reserved station SBOO5C function disable request accept status Turns ON when the Reserved station function disable request accept status Reserved station SBO05C is turned ON and disabling the reserved station function is SBOOS5D function disable completed completion st
347. tored to their original state according to parameters in the master station Ignore Station Error List r Legend Operation Method Normal station Os Ignoring station 15 Ignoring errors based EE Unassigned station number errors on parameters Not selectable Not selectable Operation Method 1 Set a station to temporarily ignore station errors by clicking the appropriate station number box 2 Click the apply OK button to reflect the changes O5 Will be set to ignore Ignore station errors will be station errors disabled ic Cancel Operating procedure 1 Select stations to be set restored as temporary error invalid stations from Error Invalid Station List 2 Click the button The temporary error invalid stations are set restored When the process is completed the contents of Error Invalid Station List are updated Point Stations to Station for which temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured When reservation for a slave station is temporarily canceled temporary error invalid station setting cannot be configured for the station An error invalid station is used in line topology In the following cases the station is not detected as a data link faulty station However stations subsequent to the disconnected station are detected as a data link faulty station Error invalid station Not detected as a data link faulty station Detected as a data l
348. transmission is stopped is specified by the Link stop start direction SW0000 to SWO0008 OFF No stop direction SB0003 System link stop ON Stop direction enabled during start up Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own station SB0047 is OFF e For SBO000 to SB0003 this is enabled when only one of them is turned ON Clears the link special registers for the communication error SW0068 to a SWOO6B SW0074 to SW0077 SWO007C to SWO007F SW0120 to SW0127 Clear communication SB0006 d SW0130 to SW0137 SW0140 to SW0147 and SW0150 to SW0157 OFF No clear direction ON Clear direction This clears the Event history status SB007A and Event count SW007A SB0009 Event count clear OFF No clear direction ON Clear direction Errors are not counted while this is ON s17 gS Aej y Jeloeds yul xIpueddy Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are set as temporary error invalid Temporary error invalid f SB0010 stations OFF No request ON Request issued request Stations specified in Reserved station function disable temporary error invalid station setting SW0010 to SW0017 are canceled from temporary error invalid Temporary error invalid i SB0011 stations OFF No request ON Request issued setting cancel request 229 Number SB0012 SB0013 SB0030 SB0031 SB0040 SB0043 SB0044 SB00
349. uisition Setting Own Station Event o Other Stations Event i ion _ rk Int k S Reception of temporary error invalid station Set Cancel instruction Reception of reserved station temporary cancel Seti Valid Set instruction Reception of station Woe Setting Vv Vv E a El E jm Ej _ E E E gt E button Clears the network event history exists in the board GEE button Saves the network event history in CSV file format The board automatically saves event history data on the flash ROM Auto save may fail if it operates after the board is reset or powered off and later on until initial processing is completed If failed the event Invalid event history data is displayed in Event history contents Anevent generated one second before the board is reset or powered off is not saved to event history 162 CHAPTER 13 DIAGNOSING BOARD STATUS 13 2 Reserved station function enable Cancel slave stations temporarily and reserve the slave station again This function cannot be performed when the connected station is a local station Screen display W Diagnostics gt CC IE Field Diagnostics 2 gt CC IE Field Diagnostics screen gt fice tas button Reserved Station Function Enable Temporarily enable reserved stations Reserved stations can not be enabled from local stations if the selected station is a local station sub master station sub master operation It is only poss
350. us OFF Normal completion Self loopback test P SB0093 ON Abnormal completion normal abnormal end Conditions e This is enabled when Self loopback test completion status SB0092 is ON Stores the loop test completion status OFF Not executed or execution in progress Loop test completion SB0094 eine ON Completed If completed the completion status can be checked by Loop test normal abnormal end SBO095 Stores the loop test normal completion or abnormal completion status OFF Normal completion Loop test normal ON Abnormal completion SB0095 j abnormal end Conditions e This is enabled when Loop test completion status SB0094 is ON Stores the loop test request accept status OFF Loop test not accepted ON Loop test accepted Loop test request SB009A O accept status ee The master station is turned ON during loop test mode The slave stations are turned ON during the loop test and turned OFF when the loop test is completed Stores the baton pass status for each station OFF All stations normal ON Faulty station found If a faulty station is found the status of each station can be checked by Baton pass status each station SWOOA0 to SWO00A7 Baton pass status Depending on the timing of the link refresh Baton pass status each station SBOOAO each station SWOOAO to SWO00A7 and the update may be offset by one sequence scan Conditions e This is enabled when the Baton pass status own st
351. used when creating a user program to communicate with a programmable controller CPU With these functions a user can communicate without being aware of hardware types or communication protocols on the target The following table shows the list of MD functions which are provided with the software package Function name mdOpen mdClose mdSendEx mdReceiveEx mdRandWEx mdRandREx mdDevSetEx mdDevRstEx mdRemBufWriteEx mdRemBufReadEx mdTypeRead mdControl mdWaitBdEvent mdBdRst mdBdModSet mdBdModRead mdBdLedRead mdBdSwRead mdBdVerRead mdlInit mdSend mdReceive mdRandW mdRandR mdDevSet mdDevRst Description Open a communication line Close a communication line Batch write devices Extended function Send data SEND function Extended function 1 Batch read devices Extended function Receive data RECV function Extended function Write devices randomly Extended function Read devices randomly Extended function Set a bit device Extended function Reset a bit device Extended function Writes data to the buffer memory of a remote device station 2 Reads data from the buffer memory of a remote device station 2 Read the type of programmable controller CPU Remote operation of RUN STOP PAUSE Wait for an event occurrence Reset the own board Set the mode of the own board Read the mode of the own board Read the LED information of the own board Read the
352. ving projects Overwrite and save the project being edited Operating procedure 1 Z Project gt Save The existing project data are overwritten 105 sjsloig Bulaes 6 9 4 Saving Projects with Compression and Unpacking Projects This section explains the methods for saving projects with compression and unpacking projects saved with compression This function gives easier project data passes This function is not compatible with commercially available file compression and decompression tools 1 Saving projects with compression Save a desired project with compression Screen display Project gt Compress Unpack gt Compress Compress 3 Project to be Compressed Workspace Folder Path L Documents and SettingsixPiMy Documents workspace Browse Workspace Project List 2 Tt returns to the workspace list Project Compress Destination Setting Compressed File Name L Documents and Settings XP My Documents Workspace2 Project1 ifz Browse o Operating procedure 1 Set the items on the screen Item Description Project to be Compressed Enter the folder drive path where the workspace is saved Workspace Folder Path The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the __Beve _ button Workspace Project List Select a workspace and a project Workspace Name Display the selected workspace name Project Name Display
353. with stations on up to the eighth network the number of relay stations 7 L gt Page 75 Section 5 3 2 32 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 4 Network Components The CC Link IE Field Network consists of the following 2 4 1 Cables For wiring use the 1000OBASE T compliant Ethernet cables eB E EE The following conditioning cables oe RJ45 connector e EEE802 3 1000BASE T Double shielded STP Straight cable e ANSI TIA EIA 568 B Category 5e Point For CC Link IE Field Network wiring use the recommended wiring components by CC Link Partner Association Cables for CC Link IE Controller Network cannot be used for CC Link IE Field Network 1 Product Cables for CC Link IE Field Network are available from Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Catalogs for cable are also available Also the connector processing of cable length is available for your preference Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Type Model manufacturer CC Link IE Field Network cable SC ES5EW series Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd Cable types The following cable types are available depending on the operating environment e Standard type Cables for inside the control panel and indoor connection e L type Cables for outdoor connection Cables and relay adapters of flame retardant or waterproof type are also available Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric Sys
354. workspace is saved Save Folder Path The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the Browse button Select a workspace Workspace Project List j The display is switched to the project list by double clicking Workspace Workspace Name Enter the workspace name Project Name Enter the project name Title Enter the title of the project 2 Clickthe _ 5 button The project is saved in the specified folder under the specified workspace name project name and title 104 CHAPTER 9 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Point Workspace A workspace is a folder of CC IE Field Utility dedicated to manage multiple projects under the same name Do not change the workspace configuration using an application such as Windows Explorer Saving projects in an existing destination When saving a project in an existing destination workspace or project the destination folder can be selected from the Workspace Project List Number of characters used for workspace name project name and title Enter each workspace name project name and title within 128 characters Note however that the total number of characters used for the workspace folder path workspace name and project name should not exceed 150 characters Network drive display on the Browse For Folder screen When the network drive display is not displayed log on to Windows as a user who has an access authority to the assigned folder 2 Sa
355. ws 7 Professional 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows 7 Ultimate 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows 7 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System Windows Server 2012 Standard Operating System Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard Operating System Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows 8 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System 8 Pro 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System 8 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System 8 1 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System 8 1 Pro 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System 8 1 Enterprise 32 bit version 64 bit version Operating System 1024 x 768 dots or higher 1GB or more CD ROM disk drive CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Item Description Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Visual Basic 3 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic 3 Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic 3 Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 Visual Basic Programming language Microsoft Visual Studio 2013 Visual Basic English version sd 2 us Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual C Microsoft Visual Studio 2012 Visual C Mi
356. ws Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 2 Behavior when the fast startup function is enabled The following explains the behavior of the board when the fast startup function is enabled e The board is not reconnected even after the fast startup e After the fast startup 28141 9213H System sleep error occurs when accessing CC Link IE Field Network board from the CC IE Field utility or an application program which includes MELSEC data link library function 3 Measurement When the fast startup function is enabled on the personal computer the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager For details of MELSECPowerManager refer to the following section KL Page 275 Appendix 13 274 APPENDIX Appendix 13MELSECPowerManager MELSECPowerManager is a service application which monitors the Windows Power Options settings every 30 seconds to prevent the personal computer from entering the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function MELSECPowerManager is applicable for the following operating systems e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2008 e Windows Server 2008 R2 e Windows 7 e Windows Server 2012 e Windows Server 2012 R2 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 When a personal computer is set to enter the power save mode hibernate sleep or the fast startup function is enabled the following message is displayed and the setting is changed by MELSECPowerManager
357. xplains a method for checking the CC Link IE Field Network status of a selected board Target station by CC IE Field Utility for the CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics is as follows Board Module Model name Q80BD J71GF11 T2 Station type Master station CC Link IE Field Network board Local station Master local module Intelligent device Head module station Ethernet adapter module Input module Remote device Output module stations Analog input module Analog output module Temperature control module High speed counter module WIOMION PIa Ql 4UIT OD Buisoubeig Zep Q81BD J71GF11 T2 QJ71GF11 T2 LJ72GF15 T2 NZ2GF ETB NZ2GF2B1 16D NZ2GFCE3 16D NZ2GFCE3 16DE NZ2GFCM1 16D NZ2GFCM1 16DE NZ2GF2B1 16T NZ2GF2B1 16TE NZ2GFCE3 16T NZ2GFCE3 16TE NZ2GFCM1 16T NZ2GFCM1 16TE NZ2GF2B 60AD4 NZ2GF2B 60DA4 NZ2GF2B 60TCTT4 NZ2GF2B 60TCRT4 NZ2GFCF D62PD2 145 13 2 1 Selecting the diagnostics target The following explains the target selection for CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics The entire network status can be checked by connecting CC IE Field Utility to a master station However when a local station status cannot be checked because of a failure such as a cable disconnection connect the utility to a local station directly 1 Selecting diagnostics target board When two or more CC Link IE Field Network boards are installed to a personal computer the Select Diagnostics Destination screen as shown bel
358. y Buisseoo0Vy 104 SuOIINeDauq xXipueddy 220 c Access examples of path switching The following shows examples of path switching during access to the control system lt Figure 1 When system switching occurs due to communication error gt CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module Connection to the control system Standby system Personal computer CC Link IE Field Network board Tracking cable CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module Connection to the control system Control system Personal computer CC Link IE Field Network board Tracking cable lt Figure 2 When system switching occurs due to standby system error gt CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module MELSECNET H Connection to the control system Standby system Pt Gl E aan ie UL SE Sn eyin error Tracking cable Personal computer CC Link IE Field Network board CC Link IE Field Network module MELSECNET H module CC Link IE Field Network Connection to the control system MELSECNET H Standby system Personal computer CC Link IE Field Network board
359. y station Station that needs 1 routing parameters 1 The stations which routing parameter settings are not supported such as head modules do not need to be set The communication with other networks is made depending on the routing parameters set to the master station Point Transient transmission range Communications can be made with stations on up to the eighth network the number of relay stations 7 To check whether routing parameters have been correctly set and transient transmission will be successfully performed perform a communication test in CC Link IE Field Network diagnostics lt gt Page 62 Section 4 7 3 On a relay station in the multiple CPU system when different control CPUs are set for the network modules Set the same routing parameters to all the control CPUs 1 1 1 Control CPU setting sJojowesed Bunnoy Z OL JaJBWeJeYg YIOMION uS ZOL Set the same routing parameters 123 2 Stations that need routing parameter settings Routing parameter settings are required for relay stations and a request source which performs transient transmission to other networks lex A setting to perform transient transmission from the station number 2 on the network number 1 to the station number 4 on the network number 3 CC Link IE Field Network Network No 1 Master station Request source Station Station Station Station Station No 0 No 1 No 2 No 2 No 1 OO00 0000 0000 Relay sta
360. z amp Set the station number ee Station No Oo Setting range 1 to 120 3 9 aq Station Type Select the station type S a TO Specify the number of relay points on the link side S 3 Setting range o T Points 16 to 2048 points for Local Station and Intelligent Device Station 2 16 to 128 points for Remote Device Station RX RY Setting 16 to 64 points for Remote I O Station Start Specify the start point of relay on the link side a Setting range 0 to 3FFO End Specify the end point of relay on the link side Setting range F to 3FFF Specify the number of registers on the link side Setting range Points 4 to 1024 points for Local Station and Intelligent Device Station 4 to 64 points for Remote Device Station RWw RWr Setting Specify the start point of register on the link side Start Setting range 0 to 1FFC Specify the end point of register on the link side End Setting range 3 to 1FFF Reserved Error Invalid Station Set reserved stations and error invalid stations 113 Item Description Set the alias Alias Setting range Up to 8 characters Set the comment Comment Setting range Up to 32 characters 2 Click the End button Screen button button Displays the Supplementary Setting screen _ gt Page 115 Section 10 2 2 1 e Equal Assignment button Displays the Equal Assignment screen lt _ gt Page 116 Section 10 2 2 2 e Identical Point Assignme

CC-Link IE Field Network Interface Board User`s Manual(For

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents